Home

EN / ACS550-01/U1 User`s Manual

1. Terminated Terminated station Station Station station 00000 00000 00000 X1 Identification Hardware description 28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 Positive SCR SOR 5 J2 2 30 A Negative i 30 A ON 31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON SCR 32 5 32 Screen OFF position ON position Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous For configuration information see the following sections Communication set up EFB on page 191 Activate drive control functions EFB on page 193 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus protocol technical data on page 201 Communication set up EFB Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Embedded fieldbus 192 Serial communication configuration ACS550 User s Manual Setti
2. Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m h ft min 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 06 6 2 R1 73 249 44 26 07A5 2 R1 81 276 44 26 012A 2 R1 118 404 44 26 017A 2 R1 161 551 44 26 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 031A 2 R2 285 973 88 52 046 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 059 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 088A 2 R4 786 2685 280 165 114A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 221A 2 R6 1952 6666 405 238 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 000467918 xls Air flow 380 480 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m h ft3 min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 178 44 26 05A4 4 R1 73 249 44 26 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 08A8 4 R1 127 434 44 26 012 4 R1 172 587 44 26 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 023A 4 R2 337 1151 88 52 Technical data 284 ACS550 User s Manual Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 x1 Frame size w BTU hr 3 031 4 R3 457 1561 134 79 038A 4 R3 562 1919 134 79 044 4 R4 667 2278 280 165 045A 4 R3 667 2278 134 79 059A 4 R4 907 3098 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3825 280 165 077A 4 R5 1295 4423 250 147 078A 4 R4 1295 4423 280 165 087A 4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 096A 4 R5 1440 4918 250 147 097A
3. disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 011 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free 014 016 Free 2 011 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free 015 016 Free 3 011 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay 014 Third Relay 015 Third Relay 015 016 Free DI6 Free 4 011 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay 014 Third Relay DI5 Third Relay 015 Fourth Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each FC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on he number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC he Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 7 0 and otherwise enabled
4. 54 5550 User s Manual Changed Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values change these parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC t MAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the LOC U CHANGED PAR menu with keys A and w 2 and pressing lt 0 CONS CONST SPEED 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT 3 Select the changed parameter on the list with keys a and w 2 The LOC UPAR EDIT value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press X to modify the 1202 CONST SPEED 1 value 0 0 Hz CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE 4 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1202 CONST SPEED 1 down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 5 E 0 HZ displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 To accept the new value press lt If the new value is the
5. 258 Technical data Ratings ex EI hes etes 259 Input power connections 263 Motor connections Q ike rare RAN eR heave PU RE S 271 Brake components 277 Control connections 281 EfficiGriGy ei tu ood vem o dafs we aka red 282 COoOliligiz s eo ccc aso ood pudiese Sb 283 Dimensions and 286 Degrees of protection 289 Ambient conditions 289 Material iva e Raa ot eee ek eke ed ats 290 Applicable standards 291 CE marking alae atta Ahad 291 C Tickmarkirig RR e ee bu 291 UL CSA markings enitn rd usq pa u cA a 292 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 292 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 293 Liability limifg mE RE uU e rae ede esa unaq 294 Product protection in the USA 295 Table of contents ACS550 User s Manual Index Contact ABB Product and service inquiries
6. 0102 Modbus register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an select using 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value
7. Double shielded Single shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables At the drive end twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analog cables or to either 1 28 or X1 32 for 5485 cables Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible Stay atleast 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable Donot mix relay controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control signals in the same cable Runrelay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Technical data 282 ACS550 User s Manual Note Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Analog cables Recommendations for analog signal runs Use double shielded twisted pair cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital cables Recommendation for digital si
8. 42 BasiciControl Panel ae titan ee eee e ui 62 Application macros ABB Standard macro usa en boas cae Sead tag 72 Wire IACI y pd 73 Altermate macro jc ein toe Fee ee eee eH ade aig nh 74 Motor Potentiometer macro 75 Hand Auto Macro sonic dag ex eod eed gated 76 PID Control macr I RD ay ma Spa Dae 77 MACIO sc ue te ew She aaa k pad dace eae a Bie ee ee 78 Torque Control macro 79 Connection example of a two wire sensor 80 User parameter 81 Macro default values for parameters 82 Parameters Complete parameter list 85 Complete parameter descriptions 98 Embedded fieldbus OVOLVIBW det stn eater as ar Mare ote qur di 189 Planning ex guy hm ie E ada a eat 190 Mechanical and electrical installation EFB 190 Communication set up EFB 191 Activate drive control functions EFB 193 Table of contents ACS550 User s Manual Feedback from the
9. 100 5550 User s Manual Group 01 OPERATING DATA This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0101 SPEED amp DIR The calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 sPEED The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction The value of 0101 sPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction 0102 SPEED calculated speed of the motor rpm Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The frequency Hz applied to the motor Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0104 CURRENT motor current as measured by the ACS550 Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0105 TORQUE Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in 96 of motor nominal torque Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0106 POWER The measured motor power in KW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACS550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 i
10. Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive ation direction Note 1 Code 0 open 1 connected 014 015 Output 0 0 Reference through CONST SPEED 1 1202 x1 1 40 kohm 11 SCR Signal cable shield screen 11 2 External speed reference 1 0 10 V 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 10v Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 Digital input common for all L 43 DI1 1 14 012 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses 16 014 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 21 Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A 4 Default operation 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Input signals Analog reference 11 Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 Constant speed selection DI
11. ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9970 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting SAVE by pressing lt If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to EXIT the Output mode by pressing 27 repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting by pressing x If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to the Output mode by pressing Z repeatedly until you get there Press to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on the right In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown ACS550 Us
12. 309 Product training 2 5 AN oie nega eec teg Duce a e e ER 309 309 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Table of contents 10 ACS550 User s Manual Table of contents 5550 User s Manual Installation 11 Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard A WARNING Before you begin read chapter Safety on page 5 Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Installation flow chart The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive Task PREPARE for installation PREPARE the mounting location REMOVE the front cover MOUNT the drive INSTALL wiring CHECK installation REINSTALL the cover START UP See Preparing for in
13. Code Description 2301 PROP GAIN Gain K 1 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller T Integration time 0 Larger values may cause speed oscillation Derivation time 0 The figure shows the speed controller output after error step error remains constant Error value Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the proportional gain Controller output Controller output get e Error value 1 p i t gt 2302 INTEGRATION TIME Sets the integration time for the speed controller Gain Ky 1 The integration time defines the rate at which Tie medido time 0 the controller output changes for a constant Ky e Tp Derivation time 0 error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the integration time e Error value 2303 DERIVATION TIME Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a controll
14. 250 2 Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 27 1 Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See chapter Application macros on page 77 Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACS550 is powered down within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding A WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 10 24V 10 24V r 11 GND 11 GND L 12 DCOM 12 DCOM I 413 DI1 13 DH I 414 D
15. Teont ACS550 Continuous ON 01 01 R Ruy 5350 lt 1050 lt 30sON lt 60sON gt 60sON seebelow AX MN gt 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm w w w w w Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100 04 1 4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500 05 4 4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200 06 9 4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000 08 8 4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000 012 4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500 015A 4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500 023A 4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds 500 600 V drive Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating P Type code 5550 Pis Piso Pio Continuous ON U1 R R lt 3sON lt 10sON lt 30sON 60sON gt 605 seebelow X MIN gt 27 5 OFF gt 505 OFF gt 1805 OFF gt 180 s OFF Y lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm w w w w w Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 548 80 93 175 257 425 1462 03 9 6 373 80 137 257 377 624 2144 06 1 6 224 80 228 429 629 1040 3573 09 0 6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359 011A 6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308 017A 6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718 T Resistor t
16. 5 0 Sensor configuration uses thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either PTC sensor a normally closed hermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this group 6 THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the table above When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this group 3502 INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 al1 PT100 and 2 12 PT100 and 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement e At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated Parameters 15
17. 131 default values listing for 82 listing for parameters 85 derating adjustment example 262 altitude 262 single phase 262 Switching 262 262 derivation time PID parameter 161 derivation time parameter 133 device overtemperature fault code 245 diagnosfles 26 ve du rey vege oes 243 EFB COMM AE eae EN 198 FRA ode eee a 229 digital cable requirements 282 digital input at fault history parameters 106 amp iso oae eRe OTEK DE n ARS 22 specifications 23 status data parameter 101 digital output CONMECHONS su 22 spacificallons a x u 281 dimensions drive 0 286 drive outside wu T renes 287 DIP swith na 20 22 direction control parameter 108 direction of rotation Assistant Control Panel 43 47 Basic Control 62 64 display format PID parameter 161 cpu e ep resree OR SAWS Edel nd 290 download parameter sets applicat
18. 257 intervals Ll pev Ld eee sQ i 255 mai fati us 256 triggers parameter group 139 manuals list of ACS550 2 providing feedback 309 mapping actual value generic profile 241 EFBmodbus 202 kada 290 maximum frequency parameter 126 torque limit parameters 127 torque select parameter 126 mechanical angle data parameter 102 revolutions data parameter 102 minimum frequency parameter 126 torque limit parameters 126 torque select parameter 126 modbus EFB addressing convention 202 EEB COllS EATER 202 EFB discrete 204 EFB holding registers 205 EFB input registers 205 EFB mapping details 202 EFB mapping 202 EFB supported features 201 EFB technical data 201 303 motor checking 24 compatibility 14 id run parameter 99 load curve break point frequency 141 load curve max fault parameter 141 load curve zero speed load 141 maintenance tri
19. TIME 1 B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 T Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 S cuve FREQ Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B the figure Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve B of thumb 1 5 is suitable relation between shape time the L gt T acceleration ramp time A gt 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 A 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 2205 IACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging acceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging deceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Parameters 132 ACS55
20. 200 fault no master station on line 199 fault swapped 199 feedback from drive 197 input reference sel activate 194 Installation 190 misc drive control activate 194 modbus actual values 208 PID control setpoint source activate 196 planning 190 profiles a Spat ea tails OY yew 202 reference scaling ABB drives profile 218 relay output control activate 195 SOUS ds dace we ick ac oy teh 191 start stop direction control activate 193 state 217 statusword 212 termination 191 EFB drive parameters 173 protocol parameter group 173 baud rate parameter 173 command words data parameters 104 config file fault code 247 control profile parameter 173 errors count parameter 173 FANE CODES u llana Be asalan 247 fault function parameter 142 fault time parameter 142 ok messages count parameter 173 parameters 173 174 parity parameter 173 protocol id 173 protocol select parameter
21. Note In order to activate and use the PID controller parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Parameters 160 ACS550 User s Manual PID controller Advanced The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers Process PID PID1 and External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 EXT TRIM PID in two different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set parameter 4230 to value 0 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS550 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system A l
22. 128 with Assistant Control Panel 46 with Basic Control Panel 64 start stop dir parameter group 107 starting order counter 180 ACS550 User s Manual start up assistant 36 51 data parameter group 98 guided Assistant Control Panel 36 limited Assistant or Basic Control Panel 31 state diagram Comm EFB 25 6 e 217 comm ABB drives 235 station id RS 232 parameter 172 status at fault history parameter 106 status word ABB drives FBA description 233 EFB comm definition 212 AS ANSE 2 S kana SOLERE 223 FBA generic profile 240 stop parametergroup 128 aux motor parameters 177 aux motor 177 DC brake time parameter 129 DC current control parameter 128 DC current ref parameter 129 emergency 265 emergency select parameter 129 flux braking parameter 137 function 128 stress tests con Ls Rx eS RR SA ES 290 supervision parameter 144 parameter low limit parameters 144 parameter selection parameters
23. Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 183 Code Description 3 DI3 Enab es the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 011 012 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor 013 First PFC Relay 014 First PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 011 012 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor 013 First PFC Relay 014 First PFC Relay 014 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor 013 First PFC Relay 014 First PFC Relay 014 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free 013 First PFC Relay 014 Second PFC Relay 015 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed 4 04 Enab es the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are
24. stopped If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 129 Code Description 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is required A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 Control switches from EXT2 to 1 oFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 oN Enables the Start inhibit function 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function
25. damper is fully opened i Parameter 1601 T l l i MOTOR STATUS ms gt Acceleration Drive coasts time to stop Par 2202 Parameters 124 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 011 Defines digital input 011 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm e 2002 Overvoltage a
26. 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic Loss of communication The ACS550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in section Communication fault on page 196 The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 FAULT TIME Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 describes these parameters in detail No master station on line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited Duplicate stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Everytime there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES
27. POWER UP Apply input power REM 00 2 Basic Control Panel into the Output mode OUTPUT FWD The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start REM Y CHOICE up Assistant If you press S the Start up Assistant is not use the start up run and you can continue with manual start up in a similar assistant manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel NO EXIT 00 00 MANUAL ENTRY OF START UP DATA Group 99 START UP DATA If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the language REM EDIT the Basic Control Panel does not support languages See 9901 LANGUAGE parameter 9901 for the values of the available language ENGLISH alternatives You find parameter descriptions in section 0 Complete parameter descriptions starting page 98 CANCEL IL 00 09 1 SAVE The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel on page 67 Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 49 The general parameter setting procedure REM E F 1 To go to the Main menu press X if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom MENU FWD 2 Press keys lt a K vw 2 until you see PAr and press SNJ REM 0 1 PAR FWD 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with Keys 7 7
28. if the bottom line shows FwD OUTPUT otherwise press 7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys 2 lt w2 until you see rEF and press sJ Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press CQ to stop the motor Start up control with I O and ID Run 5550 User s Manual To change the direction of the motor rotation Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 and W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is discharged Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION DECELERAT Set the minimum speed parameter 2001 Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 Note Check also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206
29. 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs RELAY 2 STATUS See parameter 0122 RELAY 3 STATUS 0124 1 analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 2 analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT PID controller 1 output value in 96 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT PID controller 2 output value in 96 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK PID 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link Parameters 102 ACS550 User
30. Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoderis not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE Diagnostics 5550 User s Manual Faut Fault name in Description and recommended corrective action code panel 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 Adequacy of motor braking torque Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 RESERVED Not used 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections
31. IEC EN 60204 1 2005 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing device asupply disconnecting device 60529 2004 Degrees of protection provided enclosures code IEC 60664 1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirements and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 requirements specific test methods UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third ipu edition LISTED C22 2 No 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment for ACS550 U 1 68 drives only CE marking C A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC Note The 600 V ACS550 U1 drives are not CE approved Compliance with the EMC Directive The D
32. 1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1301 MINIMUM AI1 gt 1302 MAXIMUM 11 1304 MINIMUM AI2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1504 MINIMUM AO1 gt 1505 MAXIMUM 1 1510 MINIMUM 2 gt 1511 MAXIMUM 2 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Px lt 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are KW or PN 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are hp e g in US 1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following Extension relay module not connected and 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 PAR PFC MODE Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR FREQ when 8123 ENABLE is activated Diagnostics 5550 User s Manual 249 Fault Fault name in code panel Description and recommended corrective action 1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values f
33. DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded fieldbus 216 ACS550 User s Manual State diagram ABB Drives profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not re
34. board of the drive The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is six in ten minutes WARNING The ACS550 01 U1 is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for replacement WARNING The ACS550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on WARNING The heat sink may reach a high temperature See chapter Technical data on page 259 Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB representative Safety ACS550 User s Manual 7 Table of contents Safety Use of warnings and notes 5 Table of contents Installation Installation flow chart s s rc nz etes i Ub al eet tee 11 Preparing for 12 Installing the drive 16 Start up control with I O and ID Run How to start up the drive 31 How to control the drive through the I O interface 38 How to perform the ID 39 Control panels About control panels 3 222 the ERE e UNE E 41 41 Assistant Control Panel
35. ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 95 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 4123 SLEEP LEVEL 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 0 0 Hz 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 096 4107 4126 DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 EXT TRIM PID 4201 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 15 605 4203 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 05 0 15 0 05 4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 05 0 15 1 05 4205 ERROR VALUE INV NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 4206 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4207 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 0 VALUE Unit scale defined par 4206 and 0 0 4207 4209 100 VALUE Unit scale defined par 4206 and 100 0 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 v 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 40 096 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4213 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4214 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 SEL 4216 1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 v 4217
36. Section Communication set up on page 225 section Activate drive control functions on page 225 The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual 225 Communication set up FBA Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 PROT SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial communication configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status See Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions Activate drive control functions FBA Fieldb
37. This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 011 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop comma
38. Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM ACT1 Sets the minimum value for 1 e Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined RAOS parameter 4016 1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 ACT 1 and 7 ACT 2 scaling is done Par4016 Source Source min Source max P 4018 1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM 11 1302 MAXIMUM I 2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUMAI2 1305 MAXIMUM 12 Source min Source max 3 Current 0 2 nominal current Source signal 4 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 5 Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power ACT1 96 B See the figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 P 4018 MAXIMUM I 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 i See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 40194 TERNOS 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM l Sets the minimum value for 2 min Sous m e See 4018 ACT MINIMUM ANE Source signal 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT MINIMUM 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function sEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 011 Defines digital input D11 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI
39. ea ene 289 relay output parameter 116 activation condition parameters 116 off delay parameters 117 on delay parameters 117 status data parameter 101 relays 281 REM remote control indication on Assistant Control Panel 43 indication on Basic Control Panel 62 remove Cover 16 reset automatic parameter 143 analog input less than min parameter 143 delay time parameter 143 external fault parameter 143 number of trials parameter 143 overcurrent parameter 143 trial time 143 undervoltage parameter 143 resolution listing for parameters 85 resonance avoiding select parameter 136 revolution counter data parameter 102 revolutions mechanical data parameter 102 pri MUGS kd s a 269 306 RS 232 baud rate parameter 172 parity parameter 172 station id 172 RS 232 counts buffer overruns parameter 172 CRC errors parameter 172 frame errors parameter 172 ok message
40. lu reu 22 requirements 281 control panel a oe oe as 41 cable requirements 282 comm error fault parameter 140 display bar graph 147 148 display decimal point form parameters 147 display max parameters 148 display min parameters 148 display process variables parameter group 147 display selection parameters 147 display units parameters 148 258 manual compatibility 41 parameter lock parameter 121 pass code parameter 121 reference control parameter 109 signal max parameters 147 signal min parameters 147 control panel 42 AOW aec Ere rue 43 assistants 51 battery eset SER 258 changed parameters mode 54 clock set 56 direction of rotation 43 47 display contrast 48 fault logger mode 55 faut mode r u yu uu 5 43 243 244 help Castine saya 45 how to do common tasks 44 I O settings 61 Main MENU eee ee ee 44 operation oem Se
41. systems Drive s power connection terminals ACS550 User s Manual WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For IT systems an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filters ACS550 01 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 ACS550 U1 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove the 1 screw drive is shipped with EM3 removed see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F1 and F2 screws see section Power connection diagrams page 21 Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings DoNOT install an external RFI EMC filter Using an EMC filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the drive The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals 01 V1 W1 Frame U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE terminal size BRK UDC terminals Max terminal size Torque Max terminal size Torque mm
42. 1306 FILTER AI2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 See FILTER AI1 above Parameters 116 ACS550 User s Manual Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means NOT SEL Relay is not used and de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires Run enable signal present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 9 SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 10 SUPRV2 OVER
43. Fieldbus adapter ACS550 User s Manual 237 ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference orrection coefficient 200 100 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 10098 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 096 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 20096 10096 096 096 50 100 Fieldbus adapter 238 Reference handling ACS550 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 163 100 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant ref 100 163 reference i L l 1 ref
44. Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output e These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See the figure P 1504 1503 AO1 CONTENT P 1510 CONTENT Sets the maximum content value P 1502 1508 Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1503 1509 e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will P 1505 i AO mA be converted to an analog output 1511 1504 1 Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 Sets the maximum output current 1504 FILTER AO1 P 1510 I Defines the filter time constant for 1 AO CONTENT The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time 1502 11508 gt specified P 1503 1509 See the figure in parameter 1303 1507 2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output 2 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above 1508 2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 2 CONTENT Sets the maximum content value See A01 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 ISets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above Parameters 120 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above
45. 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER 1 above Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 121 Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable signal NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See 011 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change parameter values
46. 20 mA 1 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 319 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction I 115 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 116 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive I 11 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A lt Default operation 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 Note 1 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable The sensor needs to be powered 26 RO3A Default operation See the manufacturer s instructions 27 Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 connection example of a two wire Fault gt 25 connected to 26 sensor is shown on page 80 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references 11 2 Analog output 1 Speed J1 Start stop hand auto 011 6 Analog output AO2 Current o gt 0 10 V Direction hand auto DI2 5 Relay output 1 Ready iq 9 p 12 0 4 20 Control location selection DI3 Relay output 2 Runn
47. 234 ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes the state diagram 4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 250 for details on alarms 0 No alarm 8 SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 0 Supervised parameter s value supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 ExT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Fieldbus adapter ACS550 User s Manual 235 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW
48. 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics 246 ACS550 User s Manual Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct Motor connections Motor parameters 9905 9909 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is ru
49. 5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Group or parameter is hidden 5022 Group or parameter is write protected 5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running 5024 Drive is busy try again 5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress 5026 Value is at or below low limit 5027 Value is at or above high limit 5028 Value is invalid doesn t match any values in the discrete values list 5029 Memory is not ready try again 5030 Request is invalid 5031 Drive is not ready e g due to low DC voltage 5032 Parameter error was detected 5040 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5041 Parameter backup doesn t fit into memory 5042 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5043 No start inhibit was granted 5044 Parameter backup versions do not match Diagnostics 254 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5050 Parameter upload was aborted 5051 File error was detected 5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed 5060 Parameter download was aborted 5062 Parameter download attempt has failed 5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected 5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected
50. Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 o o o o o o ol o o ol ol Parameters 5550 User s Manual 113 Code Description 13 013 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 013 DI4 and 015 See above 011 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 See above 011 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Selects Constant Speed 1 when Timed Function is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 Selects a constant speed depending on the state of Timed Functions 1 amp 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 011 and 012 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 pi de activated 1 DI activated DI1 012 Function 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 O Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 DI3 See above 011 2 1 for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects of th
51. FLT 32768 32767 1 rpm 0 0405 FREQ FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 2 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1 V 0 0407 CURRENT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 0 hex 1 0 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 Di4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 As par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 As par 0401 1 0 Group 10 START STOP DIR 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 011 2 v 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 0 NOT SEL v 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE 1 3 REQUEST v 3 REQUEST 1004 JOGGING SEL 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL v Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 REF1 Hz rpm 2 REF2 1 1 REF1 Hz rpm 1102 1 2 SEL 6 12 1 0 EXT1 v 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 20 21 1 1 KEYPAD v 1104 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 1105 REF1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 50 0 Hz 1500 rpm U1 60 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 17 19 21 1 2 AI2 v 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 0 096 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 100 0 Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 1201 SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 DI3 4 v 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 300 rpm 5 0 Hz U1 360 rpm 6 0 Hz 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 600 r
52. Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MoT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 2011 RESERVED Not used 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near Diagnostics 252 ACS550 User s Manual Alarm iui code Display Description 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault Note 1 reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active Note 1 To control PFC use Group 81 PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro on page 78 2015 PFC LOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 RESERVED Not used 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which
53. PAR EDIT graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use 3404 QUTPUT1 DSP FORM the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For DIRECT details see parameter 3404 9 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter LOC EDIT 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Hz Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 3 Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum LOC UPAR EDIT display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT MAX Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 1 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Control panels 5550 User s Manual Assistants mode 51 When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The
54. Profibus DP amp LonWorks CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232 Fieldbus adapter 222 ACS550 User s Manual Control interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an inp
55. Technical data 5550 User s Manual 261 Ratings 500 600 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 261 Type code Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 U1 hon Py Py lana size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V Note 1 02A7 6 2 7 1 5 2 2 4 1 1 1 5 R2 03A9 6 3 9 22 3 2 7 1 5 2 R2 06A1 6 6 1 4 5 3 9 22 3 R2 09A0 6 9 0 5 5 7 5 6 1 4 5 R2 011A 6 11 7 5 10 9 0 5 5 7 5 R2 017A 6 17 11 15 11 7 5 10 R2 022A 6 22 15 20 17 11 15 R3 027A 6 27 18 5 25 22 15 20 R3 032A 6 32 22 30 27 18 5 25 R4 041A 6 41 30 40 32 22 30 R4 052A 6 52 37 50 41 30 40 R4 062A 6 62 45 60 52 37 50 R4 077A 6 77 55 75 62 45 60 R6 099A 6 99 75 100 77 55 75 R6 125A 6 125 90 125 99 75 100 R6 144A 6 144 110 150 125 90 125 R6 00467918 xls B 1 Not available in ACS550 01 series Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Heavy duty use 50 overload capability continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute ten minutes Pha typical motor power in heavy duty use The kilowatt power ratings apply to
56. WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Usean external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay THERM 0 or THERM 1 THERM 0 Thermistor relay Control board Control board DIG P DI6 L 24 V DC m L _ 24 T X Y LZ L 10 nF Motor ey Parameters 5550 User s Manual 151 For other faults or for anticipating moto
57. intake in MWh data parameter 103 error value inversion PID parameter 161 exception codes EFB modbus 208 external comm module parameter group see FBA drive parameters external commands selection parameter 107 external control selection parameter 109 external fault automatic reset parameter 143 fault Codes s oh eer dase oes 246 140 external reference data parameter 100 F F1 and F2 screws acoso ls etu R 21 on corner grounded TN system 267 On IT systems es 268 21 267 268 fan 256 257 Index ACS550 User s Manual fault functions parameter group 140 history parameter 106 oon MN RC 244 comm failure 196 current at history parameter 106 digital input status at history parameter 106 FBA COMM un dere ERE a kiy NT 228 frequency at history parameter 106 ced oS CO e d eI 250 last history 106 OA GR em ir 244 logging Assistant Control Panel 55 mode Assistant Control Panel 43 243 244 mode Basic Control Panel 63 243 244 previous history parameter
58. 1 5 8 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 COAST 2103 MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s 2104 DC HOLD CTL NOT SEL 1 DC HOLD 1 0 NOT SEL v 2 DC BRAKING 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 0 250 0s 0 1 s 0 0 s 2108 START INHIBIT OFF 1 ON 1 0 oFF 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 2110 BOOST CURR 15 800 1 100 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 60 0 s 0 15 0 0 s NOT SEL 2113 START DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 015 0 005 Parameters 90 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2201 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 5 015 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 5 05 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 5 05 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 15 0 05 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 05 0 15 60 0 s 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 60 0 s 2207 SHAPE 2 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 15 0 05 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 0 15 1 05 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Group 23 SPEED CONTROL 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 0 01 10 00 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s 0 015 2 505 2303 DERIVATION TIM
59. 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant ref reference 1 1 1 1 1 Max ref 163 Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual 239 Actual Value As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section Complete parameter list on page 85 For example Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 196 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives profile Contents Scaling 1 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 1105 2 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Virtual addresses of the drive control The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows 1 Control Word Reference 1 REF1 Reference 2 REF2 Status Word Actual Value 1 ACT1 Actual Value 2 ACT2 o N Fieldbus adapter 240 ACS550 User s Manual Generic profile technical data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive pr
60. 115 2 kb s 5203 PARITY Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 8 NONE 1 No parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 No parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 Even parity one stop bit 3 8 opp 1 Odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check e Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes e Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible
61. 14 RREQ LOCALLOC STARTINH 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0303 STS WORD 1 Read only copy of the Status Word 1 Bit 0303 FB sTs WORD 1 0304 FB 5 5 WORD 2 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status DS READY ALARM consists of two Status Words 1 ENABLED NOTICE control panel displays the word in 2 STARTED For example all zeros and 1 Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 4 ZERO SPEED CTL MODE 0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved Read only copy of the Status Word 2 6 DECELERATE Reserved See parameter 0303 7 AT SETPOINT 8 LIMIT CPY 9 SUPERVISION 2 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REQ 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT STARTINH 15 FAULT OFF ILCK Parameters 5550 User s Manual 105 Code Description 0305 FAULT WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fault Word 1 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 When fault is active the 0 OVERCURRENT Obsolete EFB 1 corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 e Each fault has
62. 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to parameter 0135 0135 COMM VALUE 1 1502 1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling hee ici values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for Ao1 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to parameter 0136 0136 COMM VALUE 2 _ 1508 2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling _ gx iis values 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 1512 FILTER 2 Filter time constant for A02 Fieldbus adapter 228 ACS550 User s Manual PID Control setpoint source Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Drive parameter Value Setting 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 1 UB 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 COMM A11 Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 1 FAULT response 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the drive FBA Inputs to t
63. 187 relay output word data parameter 101 station id 173 status words data parameters 104 status parameter 173 UART errors count parameter 173 values data parameter 101 efficien y RE seg dee ee 282 ELV Extra Low 23 EM1 EM3 screws sis Lux E ax ERY E 20 on corner grounded TN system 267 on T systems ur 268 6 325 exe RR 20 267 268 ACS550 User s Manual embedded fieldbus see EFB see EFB drive parameters EMC CE marking 35 belasten 291 C Tick 0 291 motor cable requirements 274 emergency deceleration time parameter 132 stop 265 stop select 129 enclosure protection class 13 VDES EY MODA 289 encoder parameter 170 enable parameter 170 error fault code 246 fault parameter 170 number of pulses parameter 170 position reset enable parameter 170 zero pulse detected data parameter 102 zero pulse enable parameter 170 energy intake in kWh data parameter 103
64. 2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 12 v 4218 ACT MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 ACT MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4221 2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 1 0 NOT SEL 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4230 TRIM MODE NOT SEL 1 PROPORTIONAL 1 0 NOT SEL DIRECT 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 PID2REF 2 PID2OUTPUT 1 1 PID2REF Group 50 ENCODER 5001 PULSE NR 50 16384 1 1024 v 5002 ENCODER ENABLE DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE v 5003 ENCODER FAULT 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT v 5010 Z PLS ENABLE DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE v 5011 RESET DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5101 FBA TYPE 0 DEFINED 5102 FB PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 5126 Parameters 96 5550 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 5127 PAR REFRESH DONE 1 REFRESH 1 0 DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 hex 1 0 5131 STATUS 0 6 1 0 IDLE 5132 CPI FW REV 0 hex 1 0 5133 APPL FW REV 0 hex 1 0 Group 52 PANEL COMM 5
65. 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1407 2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1408 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 46 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 46 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 46 52 1 0 NOT SEL 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1414 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1415 5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1502 1 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0103 1503 1 CONTENT Defined by par 0103 1504 IMINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 0 1 mA 0 0 1505 AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 15 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 99 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 1508 02 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0104 1509 02 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 0 1 mA 0 0 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 89 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 1511 MAXIMUM 2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0
66. 5080 Operation is not allowed because the drive is not in local mode 5081 Operation is not allowed because a fault is active 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is not open 5084 Operation is not allowed because drive is busy try again 5085 Download is not allowed because drive types are incompatible 5086 Download is not allowed because drive models are incompatible 5087 Download is not allowed because parameter sets do not match 5088 Operation failed because a drive memory error was detected 5089 Download failed because a CRC error was detected 5090 Download failed because a data processing error was detected 5091 Operation failed because a parameter error was detected 5092 Download failed because parameter sets do not match Diagnostics 5550 User s Manual 255 Maintenance WARNING Read chapter Safety on page 5 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance intervals Heatsink If installed appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness ofthe See Heatsink on page 255 and cleaning environment every 6 12 months Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement
67. 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8105 REFERENCE STEP 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 97 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 0 0 Hz 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 0 0 Hz 8111 START FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 0 0 Hz 8112 Low FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8113 Low FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 2 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8114 Low FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8115 AUX START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 5 05 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 3 05 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 4 1 1 8118 INTERV 0 1 TEST MODE 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 h 0 0 h NOT SEL 0 1 336 h 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 014 v 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 8122 PFC START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 8123 PFC ENABLE NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE 1 0 NOT SEL v 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 7 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 15 0 0 s NOT SEL 8126 TMED AUTOCHNG 0 4 1 0 NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS t 1 2 v 8128 AUX START ORDER 1 EVEN RUNTIME 2 RELAY ORDER 1 1 EVEN RUNTIME v Group 98 OPTIONS
68. AWG N m Ib ft mm AWG N m lb ft R1 6 8 14 1 4 10 14 1 R2 10 14 1 10 8 14 1 R3 25 3 1 8 118 16 6 1 8 1 8 R4 50 1 0 2 15 35 2 2 2 R5 70 2 0 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 185 350 MCM 40 30 95 4 0 8 6 00467918 xls B 1 Aluminium cable cannot be used with frame sizes R1 R5 because of its lower capacity Technical data 5550 User s Manual 269 Power terminal considerations R6 frame size WARNING For R6 power terminals if screw on terminal lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive They require crimp on ring lugs as described below Crimp on ring lugs On the R6 frame size if screw on terminal lugs are supplied but the cable size used is less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG or if no screw on terminal lugs are supplied at all use crimp on ring lugs according to the following procedure 1 Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table Remove the screw on terminal lugs if supplied 3 Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing 5 Attach the ring lugs to the drive Wire size Cni f o 2 kcmil Manufacturer Ring lug toni g crimps mm AWG 46 Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 lisco 6 38 ILC 10 2 55 d Burndy YA
69. Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parametrer 5132 Parameters 172 5550 User s Manual Group 52 PANEL COMM This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address not allowed on line Range 1 247 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s
70. C 104 F ambient temperature 70 C 158 F surface temperature not more than three current carrying cables with concentric copper shield ae or cable or earth not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder side side copper cables with concentric copper shield Max load Cu cable Max load Al cable Max load Cu wire size current current current mm A mm AWG kcmil 14 3x1 5 Aluminium cable 22 8 14 2 pes 27 3 4 because of its lower 36 4 10 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 86 5 4 79 3x25 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1 153 3 70 143 3 95 155 1 0 186 3 95 165 3 120 178 2 0 215 3 120 191 3 150 205 3 0 249 3 150 218 3 185 237 4 0 284 3 185 257 3 240 264 250 2 1 274 3x 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Ground connections For personnel safety proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Technical data 5550 User s Manual 267 Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations In multiple dr
71. EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parame er mapped o Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parame er mapped o Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parame er mapped o Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parame er mapped o Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parame er mapped o Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parame mapped Modbus Register 40011 5317 17 Specifies the parame er mapped o Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 175 Group 81 PFC CONTROL This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major features of PFC control are ACS550 controls the motor of pump 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACS550 switches pump no 2 an
72. ENTER 2 Go to the Clock Set mode by selecting CLOCK SET on the menu with keys LOC QU TIME amp DATE CLOCK VISIBILITY A and vw 2 and pressing lt DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu press LOC U CLOCK VISIB 1 S select Show clock Hide clock and press jon if want to return lt J x to the previous display without making changes press em To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press CANCEL and select a suitable format Press wl to save or CZ to cancel your changes To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the menu press CANCEL and select a suitable format Press E wil to save or to cancel your changes To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press s Specify the hours with keys and amp w 2 and press Then specify the minutes CANCEL Press lt to save or CT to cancel your changes Hide cloc EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC DATE FORMAT 1 dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy CANCEL 00 00 LOC _ UTIME_FORMAT _ hour CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC USET TIME IE 41 CANCEL 00 00 Control panels 5550 User s Manual 57 Step Action set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press lt Specify the first part of
73. Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and electrical installation EFB WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Drive terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 ohm Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 191 To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table
74. PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 1 0140 RUN TIME 0 00 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0 00 kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 0143 DRIVE TIME 0 65535 days 1 day 0 0144 DRIVE TIME LO 00 00 00 23 59 58 1 2s 0 0145 TEMP Par 3501 1 3 10 200 1 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 0146 MECH ANGLE 0 32768 1 0147 MECH REVS 32768 32767 1 0148 Z PLS DETECTED 0 NOT DETECTED 1 DETECTED 1 DETECTED 0150 cB TEMP 20 0 150 0 1 0 C 0151 KWH 0 0 999 9 kwh 1 0 kWh 0152 INPUT MWH 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0158 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 0301 CMD WORD 1 0302 CMD WORD 2 0303 STS WORD 1 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 87 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0304 STS WORD 2 1 0 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0 0307 FAULT WORD 1 0 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0 Group 04 FAULT HISTORY 0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time days 1 day 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 ITime hh mm ss 25 0 0404 5
75. Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 A 1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 AI2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 coMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference 013 increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs 015 and DI6 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination
76. REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 205 Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 DI1 DI1 DI1 10034 DI2 012 012 10035 013 DI3 DI3 10036 014 014 014 10037 015 015 015 10038 016 016 016 1 Active low For the 1xxxx registers Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete
77. Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if Noauxiliary motors are running f Hz 5550 output frequency exceeds the limit i 8109 1 Hz A P815 lt Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX START D P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 810971 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8112 4 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to 2 compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See the figure where 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay G IE C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 On Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 Low FREQ 1 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete descrip
78. Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref 1 PID 2 J Trimming PID2 out Parameters 170 ACS550 User s Manual Group 50 ENCODER This group defines the setup for encoder use Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution Enables the encoder operation Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset See also User s Manual for Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 3AUA0000001938 English Code Description 5001 PULSE NR Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution ppr 5002 ENCODER ENABLE Enables disables an optional encoder DISABLE Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model applies for any setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 ENABLE Drive uses feedback from an optional encoder This function requires the Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 and an encoder Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 2 VECTOR TORQ The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED The encoder provides speed feedback This is not closed loop speed regulation However using parameter 2608 sLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy
79. cable wire requirements 266 fault protection 273 H h nd auto 76 heat OSS eios qe vea e EA upas ax Seria 283 hood IP54 UL type 12 17 30 how to do common tasks with Assistant Control Panel 44 with Basic Control Panel 63 I O settings Assistant Control Panel 61 control through 38 idrun fail 2 2 Eror uyay 246 99 performing cis Ree eR 39 identification magnetization 99 IEC ratings see ratings impedance grounded network see IT system incompatible software fault code 247 information parameter group 146 input power cable wire requirements 265 disconnecting device disconnecting means 263 specifications 263 input power connection IT Systent 5 FK Qe PV YS 268 l g for R wham EXER 269 terminal 268 268 installation check list s sa uapa RCERSAUS 29 compatibility scores cles ere 14 environment 14 flow chart ur u a 11 location W da isq 15 mounting drive 17 preparation 12 proc
80. data parameter error feedback inversion parameter external source activate parameter feedback multiplier parameter feedback select parameter feedback data parameter gain integration time parameter internal setpoint parameter offset output data parameter parameter set select parameter scaling 0 100 parameters setpoint maximum parameter setpoint minimum parameter setpoint select parameter setpoint source EFB comm activate setpoint source FBA comm activate setpoint data parameter sleep delay parameter sleep level parameter sleep selection parameter trim mode parameter trim scale parameter units actual signal parameter wake up delay parameter wake up deviation parameter PID controller advanced set up basic set up planning EFB comm power consumption MWh maintenance trigger data previous faults history parameters process PID sets parameter groups process variables data parameter product inquiries eae BER Oa recat trainin
81. decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time A 7 speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 8126 ITIMED AUTOCHNG Sets the autochange using a Timed function See parame NOT SEL 1 FUNC 1 Enables autochange when Timed func er 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL ion 1 is active 2 4 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Enables autochange when Timed function 2 4 is active 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors e This value includes also the speed regulated motor e This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated PFC but it needs to be included in this value motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary
82. if two deceleration times will be used in the application SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 81 Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use forward direction ION TIMES reverse direction 35 LOC PAR 2001 FWD LOC 2002 PAR FWD LOC 2202 PAR FWD LOC 2203 PAR FWD CHECK LOC 9902 PAR FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run 36 How to perform the guided start up ACS550 User s Manual To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand A A SAFETY procedu
83. max limit select parameter 126 limit parameter 127 min limit select parameter 126 min limit 126 ramp down 135 ramp up 135 torque control parameter 135 WACO cs wale SS poe ee Aaa eS 79 ramp down parameter 135 ramp up 135 vector torque mode 98 training cc eee Seas ee endear RR xag gs 309 trim mode PID parameter 168 scale PID 168 two wire sensor connection example 80 type code s a e nuusan elit Bats 12 13 U ratio parameter 137 UL CSA 08 292 underload curve undervoltage automatic reset parameter 143 control enable parameter 125 ungrounded network see IT system units PID parameter 161 unknown drive type fault code 248 unpacking 12 unsymmetrically grounded networks see corner grounded TN system user load curve parameter 156 fa lt code cunts eo Ede eR EPs x 247 frequency parameters 156 157 function parameter 15
84. see user load curve overspeed fault code 247 overvoltage control enable parameter 125 panel communication parameter group 172 panel display variables parameter group 147 panel firmware version 41 45 panel loss fault 245 parameter analog input scale faultcode 248 analog output scale fault code 248 change cuisse ex pp hdi RAI qd 121 descriptions iov a ces Vus OE es 98 external relay output faultcode 248 fieldbus fault 248 hz rpm fault 248 listing ranges resolutions defaults 85 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 249 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 248 PFC IO fault code 249 PFC mode fault code 248 ref neg fault code 248 save 122 table version parameter 146 user load curve fault code 249 view parameter 124 parameter mode Assistant Control Panel 49 Basic Control Panel 67 parameter restore Assistant Control Panel 58 Basic Control Panel 69 ACS550 User s Manual parity RS 232 parameter errors count 172 patens ci ius eser x
85. t Delay Zero speed delay can be used e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The drive modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The drive modulates motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart Note Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 RAMP for zero speed delay to operate 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Zero Speed Delay function 2113 START DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes If START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 131 Group 22 ACCEL DECEL This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use
86. the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM 11 1304 MINIMUM AI2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT AI2 JovsT Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source See above AI1 JOYST description 2 4 0V 0mA EXT REF 1 MIN Hysteresis 4 of full scale Parameters 110 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up Digital input D14 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above 0130 40 except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 coMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source S
87. to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes e g the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any G
88. 0 V in of motor frequency f Hz 2605 U F RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications Square is more silent for most operating frequencies Parameters 138 5550 User s Manual Code Description 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 262 Higher switching frequencies mean less noise The 1 4 and 8 kHz switching frequencies are available for all types except for ACS550 01 246A 4 only 1 and 4 kHz are available The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ The 12 kHz switching frequency is available for 200 V and 400 V frame sizes R1 R4 except for the R4 types ACS550 01 087A 4 and ACS550 U1 097A 4 and for 600 V frame sizes R2 R4 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL fow switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550 limit R1 R4 drives see par 2606 internal temperature rises above a limit See the figure R6 drives see par 2606 This function allows the highest possible switching 12 kHz frequency to used based operating conditions Higher switching frequency results lower acoustic
89. 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2902 COOLING FAN 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 Mrev 0 disables 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 Mrev 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 91 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 2907 MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 0 disables 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh 2908 MWh 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 3001 AIXMIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 NOT SEL 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 FAULT 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 3005 THERM PROT NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3006 THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1 500 s 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz 3010 FUNCTION NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 0 NOT SEL 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3017 FAULT DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE v 3018 FAULT FUNC NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP 7 1 0 NOT SEL 3 LAST SPEED 3019 FAULT TIME 0 60 05 0 15 3 05 3021 JA11 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3022
90. 100 10096 16396 reference i T L 1 l 1 1 I 1 l l ref lt 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant ref Max ref ee h T l l l 1 1 Fieldbus 163 100 reference 100 163 1 ref A Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 221 Fieldbus adapter Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices Connect using either H Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 189 fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols
91. 1016 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 1 The 2 reference 20 RO1A Default operation 7 2 erencei d Vector 21lROIB Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 IRO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 2 23 2 Default operation D open T connected 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 DI4 Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 Reference through 26 RO3A Default operation coNsT SPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 T CONST SPEED 2 1203 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output 2 Current 2 0 10 V Constant speed selection 013 4 gt Relay output 1 Ready AI2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection 015 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 E o Al1 0 10 V N Z AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACS550 User s Manual 3 wire macro 73 This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start stop buttons are disabled Connection example
92. 1055 00 00 DETAIL 3 see the details of fault select it with keys and amp wv 2 and press DETAIL LOC U PANEL LOSS FAULT 10 FAULT TIME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TIME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG 4 To show the help text press lt Scroll the help text with keys and SN After reading the help press lt to return to the previous display LOC UDIAGNOSTICS Check Comm lines and connections parameter 3002 Banane er in groups 0 and EXIT 00 00 OK Control panels 56 5550 User s Manual Clock Set mode In the Clock Set mode you can show or hide the clock change date and time display formats setthe date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC t MAIN MENU 1 by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00
93. 106 reset v gon e DR S 249 reset select 121 speed at history parameter 106 status at history parameter 106 time of history parameters 106 torque at history parameter 106 voltage at history parameter 106 words data parameters 105 fault display wat 244 clu beri 243 faultnsmes icis 244 FB actual signals parameter group 104 FBA 0 221 fieldbus 221 actual 223 analog output control activate 227 comm fault response 228 configuration 225 control word 222 control word ABB drives 232 diagnostics st eae 229 drive feedback 228 fieldbus control activate 225 input reference sel activate 226 Installations x es sau 224 PID control setpoint source activate 228 planning cos 223 223 relay output control activate 227 SECU Scania das us V Gere ess 225 start stop direction control activate 225 state diagram ABB drives 235 status
94. 12 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 011 activated ExT1 011 de activated EXT2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference 1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference EXT REF 1 MAX source 1 AI Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 2 AI2 Defines analog input 2 A12 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN 10 V 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for 20 mA joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum using parameter 1104 The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use
95. 2 Booster and Time Period 2 selected the timer 19 T1 T2 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 T3 B Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 155 Code Description 21 T1 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 3 selected 22 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 2 3 selected 23 T1 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 3 seleci 24 T4 B Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer 25 T1 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in 26 T2 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in 27 T1 T2 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 4 seleci 28 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in 29 T1 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 3 and 4 seleci 30 T2 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 seleci 31 T1 2 3 4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 se he timer he timer ed in the timer he timer he timer ed in the timer he timer ed in the timer ed in the timer ected in the timer 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC See parameter 3626 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC See parameter 3626 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC See parameter 3626 Parameters 156 ACS550 User s Manual Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of
96. 4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 124A 4 R6 1940 6625 405 238 125A 4 R5 1940 6625 350 205 157A 4 R6 2310 7889 405 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9597 405 238 195A 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 246A 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 00467918 xls B Technical data 5550 User s Manual Air flow 500 600 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 600 V drives 285 Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 U1 Frame size BTU hr m h ft3 min 02A7 6 R2 52 178 88 52 03 9 6 R2 73 249 88 52 06A1 6 R2 127 434 88 52 09 0 6 R2 172 587 88 52 011A 6 R2 232 792 88 52 017A 6 R2 337 1151 88 52 022A 6 R3 457 1561 134 79 027A 6 R3 562 1919 134 79 032A 6 R4 667 2278 280 165 041A 6 R4 907 3098 280 165 052A 6 R4 1117 3815 280 165 062A 6 R4 1357 4634 280 165 077A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 099A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 125A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 144A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 00467918 xls B Technical data 286 Dimensions and weights ACS550 User s Manual The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of the frame size first find the Type code on the drive labels see sections Type code on page 13 and Drive labels on page 12 Then look up that type code in the rating tables see chapter Technical data page 259 to determine the frame size A complete set of dimensional dr
97. 60 JJS 60 062A 6 62 80 80 JJS 80 077A 6 77 100 495 100 099 6 99 125 150 408 150 125A 6 125 160 175 JJS 175 144A 6 144 200 200 JJS 200 Emergency stop devices 00467918 xls The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential Input power cables wiring Input wiring can be any of a four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding is not required four insulated conductors routed through conduit Technical data 266 ACS550 User s Manual Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 268 The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table IEC NEC Based on Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires PVC insulation 90 C 194 F wire insulation 30 86 F ambient temperature 40
98. 80 13 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive I 114 012 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 115 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 116 DI4 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control I 417 DI5 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 118 016 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A pA Default operation Note 2 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI5IDH Output 23 2 Default operation 0 10 Reference through 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 1 0 CONST SPEED T 1202 25 Relay output 3 programmable f0 JT coNsr SPEED 2 1203 26 Default operation ST ROSE gt Fault 4 gt 25 connected to 27 CONST SPEED 3 1204 m Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Actual value 12 Analog output AO2 Current 2 Al 0 10 V Start stop hand PID DI1 6 Relay output 1 Ready ic 9 p AI2 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection DI2 Relay output 2 Running or Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 Run enable 015 Al 0 10 V 217 AI2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 1 2 2
99. 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 Low FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 NOT SEL Disables control 1 ACTIVE Enables control Parameters 186 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off gt Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECELI Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8125 DEC IN AUX START Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on gt Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Applies only until the output of the regulated motor
100. ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with 5400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 1 COMMANDS 1002 2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 7 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded fieldbus 210 ABB Drives profile The following table and t
101. ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set 0 Mapping Modbus coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 203 relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL ref all profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL 0 OFF 1 STOP OFF1 00002 CONTROL WORD Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF21 00003 coNTROL Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE 00004 C
102. BO3B gt Fault 1 1 225 connected to 27 stored during stop or power down Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Note 2 Settings of the ramp times with acceleration and deceleration time 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current 2 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI5 Relay output 1 Ready e 9 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Runenable DI6 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 1 0 10 V 217 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros 76 Hand Auto macro ACS550 User s Manual This macro provides configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 Connection example X1 1 10 kohmJ1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 42 External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control 25 3 JAGND Analog input circuit common 14 M0V Reference voltage 10 V DC D gt 5 Al2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0
103. DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to external fault See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 ALARM When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP 3006 THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final ui temperature with steady load 1 For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp nse I class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100 RD 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor 63 manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six t times its rated current The thermal time for a Class 1
104. Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 211 ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Bit Name Value Commanded Comments state 7 RESET 0 21 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled ABE DRV FULL 0 CW 0 Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refand deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 1 Effective if 1102 comm 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Co
105. In the limited start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual f you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start up on page 31 How to perform the limited start up For the limited start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand A AN Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation page 29 SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Start up control with I O and ID Run 32 ACS550 User s Manual Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy
106. SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 AI1 Loss 2007 AI2 1055 and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 A11 Loss or 2007 AI2 Loss and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 coNsr SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault 0 NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input
107. Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 6 Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive 8 Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display 9 STOP Stops the drive in local control 10 START Starts the drive in local control Control panels 5550 User s Manual 43 Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive Loc J 49 1HzZ LOC UMAIN MENU 1 9 00 No Field Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is from the control panel REM Drive control is remote such as the drive fieldbus 2 State 7 Forward shaft direction Ui Reverse shaft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stat
108. The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete Vector control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR FREQ mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time SCALAR FLYST Selects the flying start mode Vector control modes Not applicable SCALAR FREQ mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current See parameter 2110 BOOST CURR 5 FLY BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only Flying start routine is performed firs
109. User s Manual 273 Motor cable length for 600 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with different switching frequencies As the 600 V drives are not CE approved cable lengths for EMC limits are not given Maximum cable length for 600 V drives Operational limits 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz Frame size m ft m ft R2 100 330 100 330 R3 R4 200 660 100 330 R6 300 980 1502 4902 2 12 kHz switching frequency is not available WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Motor thermal protection According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter value see Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS the function either monitors a calculated temperature value based on a motor thermal model or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or PT100 Ground fault protection ACS550 internal fault logic detects ground fa
110. V DC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 m A Application macros 5550 User s Manual 81 User parameter sets In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to save two user parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time A user parameter set consists of the user parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification The panel reference is also saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user parameter set but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1 The procedure for User Parameter Set 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To save User Parameter Set 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed the application but it is not done yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER 51 SAVE SAVE N Press I Assistant Control Panel or SS Basic Control Panel To load User Parameter Set 1 Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU Press X Assistant Control Panel or S Basic Control Panel to load The user parameter set can also be switched through digita
111. V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V drives with different switching frequencies Examples for using the table are also given Maximum cable length for 400 V drives EMC limits Operational limits Second environment category C3 First environment category C2 Basic unit With du dt Frame 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 4 kHz 8kHz 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz filters size m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft mij ft m ft m ft m ft R1 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 100 330 150 490 R2 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 30 98 200 660 100 330 250 820 R3 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 250 820 R4 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 300 980 R5 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 300 980 1502 490 300 980 R6 100 330 100 330 3 3 100 330 100 330 3 3 980 150249021300 980 1 2 3 Nottested See the new terms in section IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 292 12 kHz switching frequency is not available Sine filters further extend the cable lengths WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may
112. a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 IACCIDEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 7 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 INV above 2202 TIME 1 As Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in Linear q y FREQ the figure Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2203
113. and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart If DELAY TIME 7 zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 IAR AI lt MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault lt after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operatio
114. and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 Disables the feature 1 Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING Provides faster deceleration raising the level of torque Rated motor power magnetization in the motor when needed instead of 120954 f D 2 2 kW limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux 9 Without flux braking 2 15 kw the motor the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kW changed to thermal energy in the motor 80 1 4 75 kw Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED OR 2 VECTOR TORQ 0 oFF Disables the feature 1 Enables the feature 5 250 kw f Hz 2603 IR COMP VOLT IR compensation Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz When enabled IR compensation provides an extra gt Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR 3 SCALAR FREQ compensation for example in applications that require a gt Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque overheating Motor Typical IR compensation values are voltage 380 480 V drives kW 3 7 5 15 37 132 IR comp V 18 15 12 8 3 A IR compensated B No compensation P 2603 2604 IR COMP FREQ Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is
115. as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 1 12 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference 20 PID2OUT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Parameters 5550 User s Manual 163 Code Description Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B value value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value coMM for values 9 10 and AI1 for values 14 17 B Correcting reference 11 for values 9 10 and 7 AI2 for values 14 17 Example figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where 25 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Sets a constan
116. by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 0x0F Hex Force multiple coils 1 Mapping Modbus discrete inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV
117. change the default signals select from Group 01 OPERATING DATA up to three signals to be browsed Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 i e no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text 2 Specify the decimal point location use the decimal point location LOC unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if LOC parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 PAR Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and LOC maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is Hz s
118. column that best matches your data ONmax lt column specification and Duty cycle lt column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column Foroverhauling loads double the rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column 208 240 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating P Type code ACS550 Pro Continuous ON 01 01 Ruy S3sON lt 1080 lt 3060 lt 60sON gt 605 seebelow AX MIN 5 27s OFF gt 50 5 OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm w w w w w Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 234 80 45 80 120 200 1100 06 6 2 160 80 65 120 175 280 1500 07 5 2 117 44 85 160 235 390 2200 012 2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000 017A 2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000 024A 2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500 031A 2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds Technical data ACS550 User s Manual 279 380 480 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating
119. complete description of the operation imit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time 8116 AUX MOT STOPD Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors period before the auxiliary motor stops The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Parameters 178 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8117 NR OF AUX MOT Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACS550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 defines the relay as used for e The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the
120. complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 292 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below First environment drives of category C2 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 for the frame size and switching frequency in use WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Second environment drives of category C3 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 for the frame size and switching frequency in use Technical data 294 ACS550 User s Manual WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such
121. control settings Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint stop the drive in local control press start the drive in local control press lt gt How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode Step Action Display 1 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing 9 The display briefly shows message LoC before Hz returning to the previous display OUTPUT FWD 2 To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to Loc reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press A i Hz OUTPUT REV Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Control panels 5550 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can 65 monitor actual values of up to three Group 01 OPERATING DATA signals signal at a time start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing CZ until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one Group 01 491 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REM right P
122. controlled 40134 bit 3 or 00036 by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 comm Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 comm Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 by fieldbus More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus protocol Drive parameter Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 A01 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to 0136 COMM VALUE 2 ies parameter 0136 40136 Embedded fieldbus 196 PID control setpoint source ACS550 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the field
123. default value the LOC U CHANGED PAR _ parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters 0 CONS P PEED To cancel the new value and keep the original press 1504 CONST DEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels 5550 User s Manual Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can 55 view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC tU MAIN MENU 1 by pressing gt repeatedly until you get to the Main menu 5 5515 5 CHANGED EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with keys A and SY 2 and pressing lt The display shows the fault log starting with the latest fault The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics LOC U FAULT LO0G PANEL LOSS 19 03 05 13 04 57 6 DC UNDERVOLT 6 1
124. defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free 014 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters 184 5550 User s Manual Code Description 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 011 014 Free Not allowed 015 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free 1 D
125. display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 oUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT eee 3404 value Display Range Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 0 3 42768 32767 0 7 Defines the decimal point location Signed Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 1 3 1 9 point 2 3 14 See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 3 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure 5 3 1 Unsigned identical to the source signal See Group 01 OPERATING DATA 6 3 14 parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 85 7 3322 for resolution which indicates the decimal point location and the units of measure 8 Bar meter displayed 9 Decimal point location and units as for the source signal Parameters 148 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT DSP FORM 9 DIRECT O NOUNT 9 C 182 MWh 27 ft 36 I s 45 Pa 54 1 63 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 l min 46 6 9 55 lb h 64 d 2 112 mA 20 m h 29 inHg 38 l h 47 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 122 212dm s 30 FPM 39 m s 48 57 fts 66 m min 4 96 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb
126. downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL LOC d L A Download All is used as an example with keys and w 2 MENU Press During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa 0 d L 5 0 percentage of completion FwD Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Diagnostics the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarm codes Basic Control Panel on page 253 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Control panels 5550 User s Manual 71 Application macros Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 START UP DATA parameters except parameter 9904 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1607 PARAM SAVE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 9802 COMM PROT SEL Group 50 ENCODER Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters After selecting a macro you can make additional parameter changes manually with the control panel You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default 1 ABB STANDARD is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and
127. faults Fault Logger 55 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 249 How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Clock Set 56 clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup 59 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter Backup 59 How to view backup information Parameter Backup 60 How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals 1 Settings 61 Control panels ACS550 User s Manual How to get help 45 Step Action Display Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY HUB HSA s RENE REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UHELP This group defines external sources and 2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 00 00 If the whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys and CY 2 LOC C HELP external sources and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing CZ LOC UPAR_GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTU
128. first relay with a parameter setting 31 and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on H Relay logic ACS550 ACS550 NT NUT j 1 d NT im an 4 NT NT Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 179 Code Description The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 231 or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange disabled 414144 4417 ROT RO2 RO4 ROS ROG 0 0 01 1 1 1 1 2 3 0 1 2 7 X X X X 1 Aux x x x x x 3131 X X X X 2 Aux Aux x x x x 313131 X X X 3 Aux Aux Aux x x x X 31
129. for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value for this register 40031 ACS550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 207 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Speci ies the parameter mapped
130. found to be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz foutput Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz fil f2L f2H Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz 18 23 46 52 2502 CRIT SPEED 110 Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 137 Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL This group defines variables used for motor control Code Description 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption
131. function 205 EFB mapping 205 4xxxx register EFB function 207 EFB mapping 205 A ABB feedback on ABB manuals 309 product and service inquiries 309 0 309 standard default macro 72 acceleration deceleration parameter group 131 at aux stop PFC parameter 186 compensation parameter 134 ramp select 131 ramp shape parameter 191 ramp time PFC parameter 186 ramp zero select parameter 132 time 131 activate external PID parameter 168 actual input PID parameters 164 actual max PID parameters 164 actual PID parameters 164 actual values mapping FBA generic profile 241 scaling EFB 197 scaling FBA 228 scaling FBA ABB drives profile 239 scaling FBA generic profile 241 alarm CODES Lo zov vated meets 250 codes Basic Control Panel 253 display enable parameter 124 SUNG essem AT Cae CEA REED 250 words data parameters 105 alternate 74 altitude
132. if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the Basic Control Panel The time since power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days reported in 0402 30 ticks 60 seconds E g Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED motor speed at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS drive status code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 107 Group 10 START STOP DIR This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next g
133. languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels Control panels 42 Assistant Control Panel Features ACS550 User s Manual The Assistant Control Panel features alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display language selection for the display Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help Overview real time clock The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel Use Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section Diagnostic displays on page 243 2 LCD display Divided into three main areas a Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 43 b Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms c Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display 3 Softkey 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function 4 Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function 5 Up
134. motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint Displayed value be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 IRESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up Scrolls up through a menu or list Increases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Down Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive DIR Changes the direction of the motor rotation STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control N Control panels 5550 User s Manual Operation 63 You operate the control panel with menus and keys You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the lt gt arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the 5 key With the Z key you return to the previous operatio
135. obsolete 5000h 206 CB ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 PAR EXT 6320h 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h 1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h 1012 PAR PFC 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC 2 6320h 1014 PAR PFC 10 3 6320h 1016 PAR USER LOAD C 6320h ACS550 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter ACS550 User s Manual 231 Serial communication diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 232 ABB Drives profile technical data Overview ACS550 User s Manual The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY
136. on page 256 Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years See Internal enclosure fan replacement replacement on 257 IP54 UL type 12 drives Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming on page 258 Capacitor replacement Every nine to ten years See Replacement on page 258 frame sizes R5 and R6 Replace battery in the Assistant Every ten years See Battery on page 258 Control Panel The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary Remove power from drive Remove the cooling fan see section Main fan replacement on page 256 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Reinstall the cooling fan Restore power Maintenance 256 ACS550 User s Manual Main fan replacement Remove power from drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For frame size Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order Remove power from drive 3 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan 3 Remove the fan Dis
137. operation is safe 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Driveis in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may be near R1 R4 amp R7 R8 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for correct Fan failure
138. page 81 After the whole set up is completed check there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run 38 How to control the drive through the interface ACS550 User s Manual The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an ex ample PRELIMINARY SETTINGS If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key to switch between remote and local control Start by switching digital input DI1 on Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input 11 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF TH Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 o
139. panel in the Parameters mode select parameter 0401 2 Press EDIT or ENTER on the Basic Control Panel 3 4 Press SAVE Press UP and DOWN at the same time Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Usethe table in section A arm listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm ME code Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains Diagnostics 5550 User s Manual 251 Alarm code Display Description 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse
140. s Manual Code Description 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh Cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI drive s accumulated power on time in days Cannot be reset 0144 DRIVE TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds Shown in format hh mm ss Cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms e Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0146 MECH ANGLE Defines the motor shaft s angular position to about 0 01 32 768 divisions for 360 The position is defined as 0 at power up During operation the zero pos
141. specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications without prior notice Technical data ACS550 User s Manual Product protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 612 604 6 094 364 6 252 436 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 940 253 6 977 449 7 034 510 7 082 374 D510 320 5 301 085 5 654 624 6 147 887 6 265 724 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 934 169 6 984 958 7 036 223 7 084 604 D511 137 Other patents pending 5 463 302 5 799 805 6 175 256 6 305 464 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 956 352 6 985 371 7 045 987 7 098 623 D511 150 5 521 483 5 940 286 6 184 740 6 313 599 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 958 923 6 992 908 7 057 908 7 102 325 D512 026 5 532 568 5 942 874 6 195 274 6 316 896 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 967 453 6 999 329 7 059 390 D503 931 D512 696 295 5 589 754 5 952 613 6 229 356 6 335 607 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 972 976 7 023 160 7 067 997 D510 319 D521 466 Technical data 296 ACS550 User s Manual Technical data ACS550 User s Manual Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function 204 EFB mapping uses 202 1 register EFB function 205 EFB mapping deese aue ex rane 204 2 wire sensor connection example 80 3 73 3xxxx register EFB
142. state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 1 SW Bit1 0 AGTIUE n f 0 I 0 Power ON AB C D CW Bit3 0 42 OPERATION SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED OPERATION INHIBITED gt B C D CW Bit4 0 CD A CW Bit5 0 KEY State D wmm State change CW Bit6 0 B Path described in example CW CONTROL WORD SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Function Generator Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input CW Bit721 V SWITCH ON MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 CW Bit0 0 NOT READY SWITCH SW 0 0 CW x1xx xxxx x110 READY TO SW Bit0 1 SWITCH ON 1 CW 1 x111 READY TO OPERATE SW Bitt 1 CW Bit3 1 and pw Bit12 1 OPERATION ENABLED SW Bit2 1 x1xx xxx1 1111 i e Bit 4 1 RFG OUTPUT ENABLED CW Xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 i e Bit 5 1 RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED x1xx x111 1111 i e Bit 6 1 OPERATING SW Bit8 1 Embedded fieldbus 218 Reference scaling ABB Drives and DCU profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU ACS550 User s Manual profiles ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks type REF1 32767 Speed 200
143. the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFC operation Starting order counter Output operation of the starting order counter frequency Noaux taux 2aux The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on Initially 1 speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor Area The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCk When ACS550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e If the PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the
144. through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input 011 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Parameters 130 5550 User s Manual Code Description 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function If parameter value is set to zero the Zero Speed Delay function is disabled The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Speed controller remains live Motor coasts to stop Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed Cont eNA Zero Speed 2o Zero Speed t
145. to Modbus regis er 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Speci ies the parameter mapped to Modbus regis er 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds copy hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded fieldbus 208 ACS550 Us
146. 0 23 59 58 25 00 00 00 3604 START DAY 1 12 7 1 1 MONDAY 3605 sTOP DAY 1 1 5 7 1 1 MONDAY 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 285 00 00 00 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 93 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 d 1 1 MONDAY 3609 sTOP DAY 2 4 7 1 1 MONDAY 3610 TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 25 00 00 00 3611 TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3612 START DAY 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3613 STOP DAY 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3614 TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 25 00 00 00 3615 TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3616 START DAY 4 1 47 1 1 MONDAY 3617 STOP DAY 4 1 3 7 1 1 MONDAY 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 25 00 00 00 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 4 SRC 0 31 1 0 NOT SEL 3629 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0 3 1 0 NOT SEL 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10 400s 1s 20s 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0 500 Hz 1Hz 5Hz 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 0 600 1 10 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 600 1 300 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0 600 1 15 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 1 300 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 43 Hz 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3
147. 0 600 1 25 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 1 300 3713 FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 0 600 1 30 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 1 300 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 0 600 1 30 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 1 300 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 05 4004 DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 1 05 4005 ERROR VALUE INV NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 4006 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 Parameters 94 5550 User s Manual Code Range Resolution Default User 4009 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 100 0 4007 4010 POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 40 096 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4013 MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4014 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 1 4015 MULTIPLIER 0 000 SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4016 1 INPUT 1 5 1 2 A12 4017 2 INPUT 1 1 2 A12 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0
148. 0 146 first environment C2 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 293 C2 motor cable length 272 definition ene 293 FlashDrop application macro parameter 98 a 20 parameter view parameter 124 floating network see IT system flux braking 137 flux optimization parameter 137 force trip fault code 247 frame errors count parameter 172 frame 259 free fall stress 0 290 frequency at fault history parameter 106 max limit parameter 126 min limit 126 motor 271 motor specification 271 switching parameter 138 Index 302 fuses 208 240 V drives 264 380 480 V drives 264 500 600 V drives 265 G gain PID parameter 160 generic profile FBA actual value mapping 241 actual value scaling 241 22255550 646 240 reference scaling 240 technical data 240 ulend i i cuir LADIES GS 18 ground
149. 0 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 70 Control panels 64 ACS550 User s Manual How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display control LOC shown on the left press 9 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 OUTPUT LOCAL LOCK 1 switch between remote control REM shown the left and local LOC 4 9 1 Hz FWD as appropriate before returning to the previous display After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE Loc L O C very first time drive is powered it is remote control and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 9 The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 66 If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local
150. 0 User s Manual Code Description 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL e Ramp is linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0 NOT SEL Not selected 1 011 Defines digital input D11 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 See 011 above 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 De activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to 0 See DI1 INV above Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 133 Group 23 SPEED CONTROL This group defines variables used for speed control operation
151. 0 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 3006 20 trip curve 700 5 and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Parameters 5550 User s Manual 141 Code Description 3007 IMOT LOAD CURVE Output current relative Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor 4 to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR When set to 100 the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from nominal 3007 100 1 150 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 1 Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed La 3008 50 Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 1 BREAK POINT FREQ i Frequency Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve gt P 3009 Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values A 1 1 A 54 ON 3 0 gt 605 25 lo Output current i 908 IN motor current 20 fo Output frequency z 180 s fark Break point frequency 15 300s A Trip time 6005 1 0 22222222 0 5 4 folfank 0 r 0 02 04 06 08 10 12 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User L
152. 00 1105 Final reference limited by Ed frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 SPeed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by at frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or 1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU profiles 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 Reference value Al reference scaling setting REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 219 ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Value Al refere
153. 001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 1 CONTENT SEL 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 1 CONTENT MAX 60 60 60 60 60 60 62 60 1507 2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 FREQ 60 60 60 60 60 60 62 60 2201 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Application macros 84 ACS550 User s Manual Application macros ACS550 User s Manual Parameters Complete parameter list The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped User Space to enter desired parameter values 85 Some values depend on the construction as indicated in the tab
154. 04 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 parameter 1208 for speed reference and ramp pair 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 for accelerating and decelerating When the jogging activation signal is lost the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed even if coast stop is used in normal operation parameter 2102 The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs parameter 1401 The jogging status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21 NOT SEL Disables the jogging function 1 011 Activates de activates jogging based on the state of DI1 011 activated jogging active 011 de activated jogging inactive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Activates jogging based on the state of D11 011 activated jogging inactive 011 de activated jogging active 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Parameters 5550 User s Manual 109 Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT This group defines how the drive selects between command sources characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE S
155. 12 January 2006 Firmware 2 068 71 6 lt Serial number ACS550 U1 031A 2 code Installation 5550 User s Manual 13 Type code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on both the type code and the serial number label 5550 01 08 8 4 404 Standard Drive 550 product series Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating e g 08A8 8 8 A see section Ratings on page 259 for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 V AC 4 380 480 VAC 6 500 600 V AC Options Examples of options B055 IP54 UL type 12 no specification IP21 UL type 1 0J400 No control panel 4404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel L511 OREL 01 Relay output extension K451 RDNA 01 DeviceNet K452 01 LonWorks K454 01 PROFIBUS Ratings and frame size The chart in section Ratings on page 259 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type code Also when using the ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltag
156. 144 supply phase fault code 246 switching 271 control 138 deratng cc be 262 parameter ion wea ae eae Sumay 138 symmetrically grounded network see corner grounded TN system system controls parameter group 121 T temperature 262 template mounting 16 terminal Ugs cen ox ad oes su 270 terminals control description 22 control specifications 282 location diagram 1 4 20 location diagram 5 6 21 terminations casseria e TAE EX dead 191 test date parameter 146 thermal fail fault 246 timed functions parameter group 152 autochange 186 booster parameter 154 enable parameter 153 source parameter 154 speed e 114 start time parameter 153 stop time 153 timed mode 114 307 JOBS Sut Ye EN QA A RV vd 14 top cover see hood torque at fault history parameter 106 boost current parameter 129 data parameter 100
157. 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 Source for minimum torque 40031 bit 15 selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 seL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 195 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 comm Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 comm Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 35 comm Relay Output controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 Relay Output 4
158. 2 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS ACS550 User s Manual This group defines the timed functions The timed functions include four daily start and stop times four weekly start stop and boost times four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 sTOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 sTOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 sToP DAY 3 Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 sTOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC A parameter can be connected to only one timer Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 1102 1 2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG Parameters 5550 User s Manual 153 Code Description 3601 5 ENABLE Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT
159. 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters 5550 User s Manual 123 Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects th
160. 201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s l 9 6 kbits s 5203 PARITY 0 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 1 0 8 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 oDD 1 5204 MESSAGES 0 65535 1 5205 ERRORS 0 65535 1 5206 ERRORS 0 65535 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 5208 ERRORS 0 65535 1 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 5301 PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 5303 BAUD RATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 9 6 kbits s kbits s 5304 PARITY 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 0 8 NONE 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5305 CTRL PROFILE ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 0 ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 0 IDLE 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5313 13 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5314 EFBPAR 14 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5315 EFB PAR 15 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5316 EFB PAR 16 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5317 PAR 17 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5318 PAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 0 hex 1 0 5320 EFB PAR 20 0 hex 1 0 Group 81 CONTROL 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0
161. 227 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description nee 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 14101 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive parameter Value Protocol reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference
162. 3 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 the drive stops I 414 DI2 Start reverse I 2415 Constant speed selection I 2416 Dl4 Constant speed selection 2417 015 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair 118 016 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 IRO1A Default operation s 21 B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 2 Relay output 2 programmable 23 2 A Default operation 013 014 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 d Reference 10202 25 IRO3C Relay output 3 programmable CONST SPEED 26 R Default Dar tion j 0 17 CcoNSsT SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B L Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference 11 Analog output 1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output 2 Current 2 0 10 V Constant speed selection 013 4 gt Relay output 1 Ready 9 p 12 0 4 20 Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running or Run enable 016 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 e Alt 0 10 V x 7 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros ACS550 User s Manual 75 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digit
163. 31 X X xX 2 x Aux Aux x x x X X X 31 X 31 2 x x x Aux x Aux 3131 X X X X 1 Aux Aux x x x x One additional when the other is rotating The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical se parame where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 relay output for he PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep ttings in the Relay Output ers 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1 1 1 11 1 1 8 Autochange enabled 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 ROT RO2 RO4 ROS ROG 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 12530127 381 34 X X X X 1 PFC X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 2 PFC PFC PFC X X X X 31 31 X X X 1 x PFC PFC x x x X X X 131 X 31 1 x x x PFC x PFC 31 31 X X 0 PFC x x x x No auxiliary motors but the autochange function standard PID control is in use Working as a 8118 IAUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets interval between changes Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autoc
164. 4 5 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Output signals 1 0 1 0 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 1 CONST SPEED 1204 Analog output AO1 Speed Analog output AO2 Current Relay output 1 Ready Relay output 2 Running Relay output 3 Fault 1 Jumper setting J1 Sp 1 0 10 if 9 p AI2 0 4 20 mA or J1 LEL 0 10 V AI2 0 4 20 mA o z Application macros 74 Alternate macro ACS550 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example x1 1 10 kohm4 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 External speed reference 1 0 10 V 4 3 AGND Analog input circuit W4 Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 1 Motor output speed 0 20 K 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 7119 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all I 23 1
165. 4019 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 4024 SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 60 0 s 4025 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 096 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 4027 1 PARAM SET 6 14 1 0 SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS SET 2 4101 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 15 60 05 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 05 4104 DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4105 ERROR VALUE INV NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 4106 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 096 4107 4109 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 100 0 4107 4110 POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4113 MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4114 SEL 1 13 1 1 1 4115 MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4116 1 INPUT 1 27 1 2 AI2 4117 2 INPUT 13 1 2 A12 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4120
166. 414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 149 Code Description 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Parameters 150 ACS550 User s Manual Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below One sensor Three sensors E An ss i Motor Motor E AGND m E AO1 DA 5 7 10 nF L 10 nF 5 8
167. 4C L4BOX MY29 3 1 lisco 4 38 25 1 Burndy YA2C L4BOX MY29 3 2 35 2 Ilsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 Ilsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 50 1 lisco 1 38 25 1 54148 8 3 Burndy YA25 L4BOX MY29 3 2 lisco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 55 1 0 lisco 1 0 38 25 1 54109 8 3 Technical data 270 Wire size CH z rimpin 2 kcmil Manufacturer Ring lug I 9 crimps AWG Burndy YAL26T38 MY29 3 2 llsco CRA 2 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 lisco 2 0 38 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lisco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 Ilsco 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 Ilsco CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas amp Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Screw on terminal lugs 2 1 Use the following procedure to attach cables if screw on terminal lugs are supplied and the cable size is 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger 1 Attach the supplied screw on lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach screw on lugs to the drive X60003 ACS550 User s Manual Technical data 5550 User s Manual Motor connections A P P 271 WARNING Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 L
168. 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 2741 736 291 880 347 D 212 8 3 222 87 231 91 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 00467918 xls Technical data 288 ACS550 User s Manual Drives with IP54 UL type 12 enclosures 54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm mm mm mm in w 213 84 213 84 257 101 257 101 369 14 5 410 16 1 W2 222 8 8 222 88 267 10 5 267 105 369 145 410 16 1 H3 461 181 561 221 629 248 760 29 9 775 30 5 926 36 5 D 234 92 245 96 254 1100 285 11 2 309 12 2 423 16 7 00467918 xls Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib 21 UL type 1 65 14 3 90 19 8 16 35 24 53 34 75 69 152 54 UL type 12 8 0 17 6 11 0 24 3 17 0 37 5 26 0 57 3 42 0 92 6 86 0 190 00467918 xls B Technical data ACS550 User s Manual 289 Degrees of protection Available enclosures P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site m
169. 5 9 and press 2 0 0 1 PAR FWD 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys REM 2 0 0 2 FWD Press and hold S for about two seconds until the parameter value is REM 1 5 0 0 rpm a shown with under the value PAR Change the value with keys 7 7 lt 2 The value changes faster while 1 6 0 0 rpm keep the key pressed down PAR FWD Save the parameter value by pressing 5 7 REM 2 0 0 2 PAR FwD N Start up control with I O and ID Run 5550 User s Manual Select the application macro parameter 9902 The general parameter setting procedure is given above The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Select the motor control mode parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 2 VECTOR TORQ is suitable for torque control applications 3 SCALAR FREQ is recommended for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20 of the nominal current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate ABB Motors C 3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 M L 55 No Ins cl F IP 55 V Hz kw min cos
170. 5 A 0 Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference 10 7 modification remote control DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To increase the highlighted reference value shown the top right corner of the LOC U 50 OHZ display press The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive 50 0 HZ permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 0 2 5 0 decrease the value press Cw 2 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press 27 repeatedly until you get there Loc W 49 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 To increase the contrast press keys lt simultaneously LOC decrease the contrast press keys lt and S w simultaneously 49 1 HZ 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU Control panels ACS550 User s Manual 49 Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can view and change parameter values start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC tL MAIN MENU 1 by pressing gt repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSIST
171. 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C x 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 x lay or 0 90 x long Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Single phase supply derating For 208 240 V series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching frequency derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 either Derate Py Pra and lon long to 80 or Set parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 90 See the parameter description for 2607 for details When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 either Derate Py Pha and f y long to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 and derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F and note that the current is limited to a maximu
172. 500 Hz Actual Value mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter 242 ACS550 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual 243 Diagnostics WARNING Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNINGIAII electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 5 must be followed Diagnostic displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using the green and red LED on the body of the drive the status LED on the control panel if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to the drive the control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 104 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to ignore the error situation report the situation as an alarm report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by The fault code on the control panel display is E Y
173. 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface module or between the module and the drive 1 FAULT The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR and the motor coasts to a stop 2 ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 DISABLE that is speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model 5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables disables the use of an encoder s Z pulse to define the motor shaft s zero position When enabled a Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft s zero position This function requires an encoder that provides Z pulse signals 0 DISABLE Z pulse input is not present or ignored if present 1 ENABLE Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero 5011 POSITION RESET Resets the encoder s position feedback This parameter is self clearing DISABLE Inactive 1 ENABLE Resets the encoder position feedback Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 5010 0 DISABLE Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE 5010 1 ENABLE Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS Parameters 5550 User s Manual 171 Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these
174. 55 ae eee urusa ON eRe YS 262 environment limit 289 shipping limit 289 ambient conditions 289 297 ambient temperature rs us wa e keene 262 environment limit 289 shipping 289 analog cable requirements 282 analog I O COONSCHONS s 22 specifications 25255254 l seas ee ey 22 analog input parameter 115 data parameter 101 fault limit 142 filter parameters 115 less than min auto reset parameter 143 less than min fault parameter 140 loss fault 245 maximum parameters 115 minimum 115 analog output parameter 119 content max parameters 119 content min parameters 119 current max parameters 119 current min parameters 119 data content parameters 119 data parameters 101 filter parameters 119 angle mechanical data parameter 102 application block output data parameter 100 application macro 98 application macros See macr
175. 550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus addressing below ACS550 Modbus reference Supported function codes Control Bits Coils Oxxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface It is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and
176. 6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 INV above Parameters 5550 User s Manual 165 Code Description 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive Requires 4022 7 7 INTERNAL See the figure A PID output level B PID process feedback 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the t
177. 6 mode parameter 156 time parameter 156 torque parameters 156 157 user parameter set 81 change control parameter 122 download UR ET RE 58 V vector speed 98 tOrque M de n 98 version firmware parameter 60 146 loading package parameter 146 panel firmware 41 45 parameter table parameter 146 Index 308 vibration stress 0 290 voltage at fault history parameter 106 rating eode 13 voltage frequency ratio parameter 137 w wake up delay PID parameter 165 deviation PID parameter 165 warning automatic start 6 dangerous voltages 5 disconnecting device disconnecting means 6 ELV Extra Low Voltage 23 EM1 EM3 F1 F2 screws 6 filter on corner grounded TN system 6 filter on IT system 6 high 6 listingi e aseo ma Shae CH 5 not field repairable 6 parallel control connections 5 qualified 5 Weight or cits dedu eser XR baad 288 wiring roro CE 22
178. 690Y 50 30 1475 32 5 083 4000 50 30 1475 56 083 660 50 30 1470 34 0483 380 V 380D 5o 30 1470 59 083 supply 4150 50 30 1475 54 0 83 4400 60 35 1770 59 083 voltage Cat 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 C3 6210 3 180 gt IEC 34 1 motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 long A motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 motor nominal speed parameter 9908 motor nominal power parameter 9909 33 a REM 99 0 4 Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal speed is 1470 rpm on the nameplate setting the value of parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive du REM 99 0 6 _ _ 9908 REM 99 0 9 Start up control with I O and ID Run 34 ACS550 User s Manual Select the motor identification method parameter 9970 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and paramete
179. 8 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 Fuses 380 480 V drives 00467918 xls B 5550 1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 05A4 4 5 4 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 015A 4 15 4 20 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 044A 4 44 60 JJS 60 045A 4 45 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 4105 90 077A 4 77 100 JJS 100 078A 4 77 087 4 87 125 125 JJS 125 096A 4 96 097A 4 97 Technical data 5550 User s Manual 265 ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 124A 4 124 160 JJS 175 125A 4 125 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 195A 4 195 246A 4 245 350 JJS 350 00467918 xls B Fuses 500 600 V drives ACS550 U1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 02A7 6 2 7 10 10 JJS 10 03A9 6 3 9 06A1 6 6 1 09A0 6 9 0 16 15 JJS 15 011A 6 11 0 017A 6 17 0 25 25 JJS 25 022A 6 22 0 027A 6 27 35 40 JJS 40 032A 6 32 041A 6 41 50 50 JJS 50 052A 6 52 60
180. 8 kHz Drive noise temperature 0 oFF The function is disabled ELLE E 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to i the figure 80 90 C 100 C 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation e squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity random component has an average of 0 Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz DISABLE 1 ENABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation 0 DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Parameters ACS550 U
181. 908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Fault queue for drive diagnostics For general ACS550 diagnostics information see chapter Diagnostics on page 243 The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0401 LAST FAULT 40401 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413 Serial communication diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are loose connections incorrect wiring including swapped wires bad grounding duplicate station numbers incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306 5309 Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 describes these parameters in detail Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 199 Diagnostic situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive
182. 9802 COMM PROT SEL NOT SEL 1 STD MODBUS 1 0 NOT SEL v 4 EXT FBA Parameters 98 ACS550 User s Manual Complete parameter descriptions This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550 Group 99 START UP DATA This group defines special start up data required to setup the drive enter motor information Code Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language There are two different Assistant Control Panels each supporting a different language set Panel ACS CP L supporting languages 0 2 11 15 will be integrated into ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AN 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPA OL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRAN AIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 T RK E 14 CZECH 15 MAGYAR Assistant Control Panel ACS CP D Asia 0 ENGLISH 1 CHINESE 2 KOREAN 3 JAPANESE 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a particular application 1 ABB STANDARD 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTOR POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 PFC CONTROL 8 TORQUE CTRL 31 LOAD FD SET 0 USER S1 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2 LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 31 LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an
183. A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 1 5 2 4 0 75 1 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 3 3 1 1 1 5 R1 05A4 4 5 4 2 2 Note 1 4 1 1 5 Note 1 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 3 5 4 2 2 3 R1 08A8 4 8 8 4 5 6 9 3 3 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 8 8 4 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 7 5 10 11 9 5 5 7 5 R2 023A 4 23 11 15 15 4 7 5 10 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 23 11 15 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 31 15 20 R3 044A 4 Note 3 44 22 30 38 18 5 25 R4 045A 4 Note 3 45 22 30 38 18 5 25 R3 059A 4 59 30 40 44 22 30 R4 072A 4 72 37 50 59 30 40 R4 O77A 4 Note 4 77 Note 2 60 65 Note 2 50 R5 078 4 Note 4 77 Note 2 60 72 Note 2 50 R4 087 4 Note 5 87 45 Note 1 77 37 Note 1 R4 096A 4 Note 5 96 45 75 77 37 60 R5 097A 4 97 Note 2 75 77 Note 2 60 R4 124 4 Note 6 124 55 100 96 45 75 R6 125A 4 Note 6 125 55 100 96 45 75 R5 157A 4 157 75 125 124 55 100 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 156 75 125 R6 195A 4 195 110 Note 1 162 90 Note 1 R6 246A 4 245 132 200 192 110 150 R6 00467918 xls B 1 Not available in ACS550 U1 series 2 Not available in ACS550 01 series 3 The ACS550 01 045A 4 an R3 frame size replaces the ACS550 01 044A 4 discontinued in 2007 4 The ACS550 U1 078A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACS550 U1 077A 4 discontinued in 2007 5 The ACS550 01 087A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACS550 01 096A 4 discontinued in 2007 6 The ACS550 01 125A 4 an R5 frame size replaces the ACS550 01 124 4 discontinued in 2007
184. ACS550 User s Manual ACS550 01 Drives 0 75 132 kW ACS550 U1 Drives 1 200 hp ACS550 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS OPTION MANUALS ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 0 75 132 kW 1 200 hp 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 English 5550 02 02 User s Manual 160 355 kW 200 550 hp 3AFE64804626 English Safety Installation Start up control with I O and ID Run Control panels Application macros Parameters Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Diagnostics Maintenance Technical data ACS550 Technical Reference Manual available in electronic format only Detailed Product Description Technical product description including dimensional drawings Cabinet mounting information including power losses Software and control including complete parameter descriptions User interfaces and control connections Complete options descriptions Spare parts Etc Practical Engineering Guides PID amp PFC engineering guides Dimensioning and sizing guidelines Diagnostics and maintenance information Etc delivered with optional equipment MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English OHDI 01 115 230 V Digital Input Module User s Manual 3AUA0000003101 English OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001935 English OTAC 01 User s Manual Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001938 E
185. AD TORQ HIGH 5 Fault resetting The ACS550 be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following Press RESET from the control panel Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used to reset the drive Diagnostics 250 ACS550 User s Manual digital input serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 55 for more information To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 FAULT HISTORY parameters 1 Using the control
186. AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3023 WIRING FAULT DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE v 3024 TEMP FAULT DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 5 1 0 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 5 0 1 s 30s 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0s 0 1 s 0s 3104 AR OVERCURRENT DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3105 OVERVOLTAGE DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3106 UNDERVOLTAGE DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3107 AI lt MIN DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE Group 32 SUPERVISION 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0 3203 1 LIM HI 0 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO 0 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 0 3207 SUPERV PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 0 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 0 Parameters 92 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 33 INFORMATION 3301 FIRMWARE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware version 3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000 F FFF h
187. AL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY PEVAO REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL How to find out the panel version Step Action Display If the power is switched on switch it off Keep key e pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Panel FW panel firmware version ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the e key the panel goes to the Output mode PANEL VERSION INFO Panel FW X XX ROM CRC Flash Rev X XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Control panels 46 How to start stop switch between local remote control ACS550 User s Manual You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local control LOC shown on the status line press Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive 1 terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press result depends how long press the key
188. ANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys T IT COT S C amp S and Y 7 and pressing S 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and LOC 1 GROUPS 99 E 01 DATA 03 ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL Press lt TU PARAMETERS APPLIC MACRO 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT 4 Select the appropriate parameter with keys and SY 22 The current LOC U PARAMETERS value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter STANDARD 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Press lt LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 9902 APPLIC MACRO down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 3 WIRE displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 6 To save the new value press lt LOC U PARAMETERS 42 CANCEL cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ 9901 LANGUAGE APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Contr
189. AR FWD 6 Press and hold 5 for about two seconds until the display shows the Loc value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible PAR FWD Note When is visible pressing keys A and Cw 2 simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter 7 Use keys gt and Y 2 to select the parameter value When you Loc changed the parameter value starts flashing PAR FWD save the displayed parameter value press x LOC cancel the new value and keep the original press 777 1103 FWD Control panels 68 How to select the monitored signals ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 1 You select which signals monitored the Output mode how LOC 1 they are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 49 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values PAR FWD By default you can monitor three signals by browsing see page 65 The LOC 1 0 4 particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL PAR FWD MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 1 0 5 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively PAR FWD To
190. ARAM above Parameters 146 5550 User s Manual Group 33 INFORMATION This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description 3301 FIRMWARE Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LOADING PACKAGE Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 6 indicates a 500 600 V rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive Parameters 5550 User s Manual Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 147 This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the Output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel e Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in the control mode Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be selected Using the followi
191. BK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x A1 A2 Parameters 164 5550 User s Manual Code Description 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1 AI1 Uses analog input 1 for AcT1 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 5 POWER Uses power for ACT1 6 comm 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1 AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 5 POWER Uses power for 2 6 comm ACT 1
192. CTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See 011 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control Timed function active enables external PID control See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 INV above 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated outpu
193. Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Technical data 5550 User s Manual 293 Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 The immunity performance of the drive
194. D1 bit 0 STOP 40301 bit 0 0301 FB CMD WORD1 1 bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit 0 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual value scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 85 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled value integer resolution 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 1 1 Where parameters percent the Complete parameter descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded fieldbus 198 ACS550 User s Manual For example Feedback Parameter Feedback integer Parameter resolution 0 o integer resolution defines 100 Value of 100 ref 100 Scaled value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz2 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz Diagnostics 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9
195. E 16 04 2007 SUPERSEDES 3AFE64804588 Rev D 24 06 2004 SUPERSEDES 3AUA0000001418 Rev E 06 12 2004 2007 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved 5550 User s Manual 5 Safety Use of warnings and notes P P P P P bb There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment WARNING The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician WARNING Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC and UDC or BRK and BRK WARNING Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover WARNING Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACS550 there may be da
196. E 0 10000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 2304 COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 015 0 005 12305 AUTOTUNE RUN OFF 1 1 0 OFF Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL 2401 RAMP UP 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL oFF 1 ON 1 0 OFF 2502 CRIT SPEED 110 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL 2601 FLUX ENABLE oFF 1 ON 1 0 OFF 2602 BRAKING oFF 1 ON 1 0 OFF 2603 COMP VOLT 0 0 100 0 V 0 1 V Size dependent 2604 COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 2605 RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED 1 1 LINEAR 2606 FREQ 1 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL OFF 1 ON 1 1 oN 2608 COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 26009 NOISE SMOOTHING DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 2901 coOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0
197. EM3 20 warning about screws at F1 F2 21 correction source PID parameter 169 cover scc dae Merde VETE 16 p Ras FAS qu 30 cover top see hood CRC errors count parameter 172 crimp on ringlugs 269 critical speeds avoiding parametergroup 136 high parameters 136 low parameters 136 select parameter 136 C Tick marking 291 current at fault history parameter 106 data 100 max limit parameter 125 measurement fault code 246 rating Bode 2252 adem eque perd E Ed 13 D DC brake time 129 bus voltage data parameter 100 current ref parameter 129 magnetizing time parameter 128 overvoltage fault code 245 undervoltage fault code 245 voltage stabilizer parameter 138 deceleration parameter 131 at aux start parameter 186 emergency time parameter 132 ramp select parameter 131 ramp shape parameter 131 ramp time parameter 186 ramp zero select parameter 132 time
198. Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 11 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay
199. For example all zeros and a 1 in 5 AlLOSS START ENABLE 2 Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 AI2LOSS EMERGENCY STOP Tin Bie 19 displays as 6009 7 PANELLOSS ENCODER ERROR 0303 ACARMIWORD 2 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START See parameter 0308 9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved 10 Reserved USER LOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 PFC AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFC ILOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Parameters 106 ACS550 User s Manual Group 04 FAULT HISTORY This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing on page 244 for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display 0402 FAULT TIME 1 The day on which the last fault occurred Either as e A date if real time clock is operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating The time since power on minus the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss
200. I1 DI4 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor 015 First PFC Relay DI6 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed 014 Free 015 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed motor Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFC Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 185 Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism Without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special four applications 4 0 NO Disables Regulator by pass control The drive fmax uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YEs Enables Regulator by pass control process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC reference drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s freq
201. I2 14 I 415 DI3 15 DI3 I 4116 Dl4 16104 I 417 015 17 015 t8 Di6 18 DI6 Installation 24 ACS550 User s Manual Install the wiring Checking motor and motor cable insulation WARNING Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to input power For this test make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the drive 1 Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 2 At the drive end of the motor cable measure the insulation resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective Earth PE Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that resistance is greater than 1 Installation 5550 User s Manual 25 Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with cables 1 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 18 Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the pig tail short to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended 8 for the motor cable to minimize noise radiatio
202. ID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 Parameters 104 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS This group monitors fieldbus communications ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal 0 STOP FBLOCAL CTL means for controlling the drive from a 1 FBLOCAL_REF fieldbus controller The command 2 IREVERSE START DISABLE1 consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions the 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 Words switch the drive between 4 RESET Reserved states To control the drive using the SEXTA Reserved Command Words an external location 6 DISABLE Reserved EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set 7 STPMODE R Reserved to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 8 STPMODE Reserved The control panel displays the word in 9 STPMODE Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 10 3RAME Z serves 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 11 RAMP 0 REF_CONST 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE Read only copy of the Fieldbus 13 RAMP IN O LINK ON Command Word 2 See parameter 0301
203. IME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 amp R7 R8 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirtor dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct Ashort circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances RESERVED Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains 1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than AI1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005
204. If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 48 If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings stop the drive in local control press start the drive in local control press lt lt gt gt LOC I MESSAGE Switching to the local control mode 1 00 00 1 The arrow tv or 5 on the status line stops rotating The arrow tv or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint Control panels 5550 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can 47 monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation setthe speed frequency or torque reference adjustthe display contrast start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly The top right corner of the LOC em Loc n display shows the reference 49 1 Hz Hz ws d value The center can be 0 5 A 0 4 A configured to show up to three 10 7 24 4 96 si
205. LOC temporary Pressing any of the following keys removes FO 0 0 8 the fault message MENU ENTER DOWN key enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display LOC U FAULT of a fault code in the Fault mode figures on the right FAULT 8 AIl LOSS stopping the motor if it was on 1 00 00 FWD Diagnostics 244 ACS550 User s Manual The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and t he fault is still active Flashing green Alarms For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In t overrides the control panel display with the display LOC Qt ALARM of an alarm code and or name in the Fault mode figures on the right ALARM 2008 PANEL LOSS Alarm messages disappear from the control panel 1 00 00 display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists LOC A2 0 0 8 hese situations the drive flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors flashes the green LED on the control panel if a
206. NHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 250 for details on alarms 0 No alarm 8 SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 0 Supervised parameter s value supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 ExT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 Unused 15 Embedded fieldbus 214 DCU profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile ACS550 User s Manual DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external ru
207. OCATION LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 ExT2 1 0114 RUN TIME 0 9999 h 1h Oh 0115 KWH COUNTER 0 9999 kWh 1 kWh 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0118 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 Parameters 86 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0119 0 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0120 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0121 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 l 0123 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0124 jao1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0125 jao2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 F 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 0 100 0 0 1 r 0128 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 1 FBK Unit scale defined par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0131 PID2FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 coMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0135 VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138
208. ONTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit 4 N A RESET RAMP_OUT_ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit5 RAMP EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 coNTROL WORD Bit6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit 7 RESET STPMODE_R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit 8 N A STPMODE_EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit9 N A STPMODE_C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP_2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN O N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 1 Active low For the Oxxxx registers Status is always readable Forcing is allowed
209. OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event yJ Lo 1405 gt On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1 OFF DELAY T n lL Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 Relay status gt On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Parameters 118 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 See 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY Defines the sw
210. Run Enable 3 Start Application macros 78 ACS550 User s Manual This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 oFF Connection example X1 1 10 kohmA1 5 Signal cable shield screen L1 2 All External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 V ot 113 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 2 4 10 Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt 0 50 Hz 5 2 Actual signal PID 4 20 PID PFC 0 10V gt 0 100 6 AGND Analog input circuit common PID setpoint D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA T 8 AO2 Actual 1 controller actual value 0 4 20 mA 1 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 42 DCOM Digital input common for all I 413 011 Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive I 4 14 DI2 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive I 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects control I 16 DIM4 Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive I 117 015 Interlock Deactivation stops
211. SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input 011 as the timed function enable signal The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ACTIVE Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the timed function enable signal This digital input must be de activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 20 30 00 3 time be changed in steps of 2 seconds Time period 2 If parameter value is 07 00 00 the timer is activated 17 00 00 I at 7 a m e Time period 4 The figure shows multiple timers on different 15 00 00 weekdays 13 00 00 12 00 00 Time period 3 10 30 00 Time period 1 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds If the parameter value is 09 00 00 the timer is deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 1 timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter val
212. Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control You can activate the assistants one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The tasks of the assistants are listed in the table on page 52 In the Assistants mode you can use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example Step Action Display T Go to the Main menu by pressing lt lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC tL MAIN MENU i by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys nose S 1 i CA and CY 2 and pressing wi Motor Set up Application Speed control Speed control 2 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the assistant with keys and w 2 and press lt LOC UPAR EDIT If you select any other assistant than the Start up Assistant it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT through the task of specification of its parameter set as show
213. TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL I 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL PPARA IRE 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 RAMP OUT _ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual 233 ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp fu
214. TRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 1 2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1403 OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 A01 CONTENT SEL 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 1 CONTENT 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 FREQ 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 2201 Acc DEC 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Application macros ACS550 User s Manual 83 ACS550 U1 5 EF 5 5 2 aE EE OR ESI ORI EB Parameter mg gt 3 9 8 ce 8 8 8 eo g E o lt 5 I L e 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1
215. This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Code Description 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See the figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM 11 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See the figure at parameter 1104 1303 FIETER AH w Unfiltered signal Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time 7 specified 100 es 7 Filtered signal l l l gt t Time constant 1304 MINIMUM 12 Defines the minimum value of the analog input See MINIMUM 1 above 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum value of the analog input See MAXIMUM 1 above
216. User s Manual Control terminals table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive 1 Hardware description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 All Analog input channel 1 programmable Defaul frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used A J1 OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm 2 7D 5 p J1 Al1 ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm 3 p AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis through 1 Mohm 9 10 V Potentiometer reference source 10 V 2 max 10 mA 1 kohm lt R lt 10 kohm 9 Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Defaul 2 not used Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types be used F T J1 Al2 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 kohm 2 12 4 5 J1 12 ON 0 20 R 100 ohm i 7 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis through 1 Mohm AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 ohm Accuracy 3 8 2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load lt 500 ohm Accuracy 3 9 AGND Analog output
217. Word ulis epu ER ee es 223 status word ABB drives 233 301 FBA drive parameters 171 ext comm module parameter group 171 command words data parameters 104 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 171 config file id revision parameter 171 config file revision parameter 171 fault function parameter 142 fault time parameter 142 fieldbus appl program revision parameter 171 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 171 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 171 fieldbus parameters 171 fieldbus status parameter 171 fieldbus type parameter 171 protocol select parameter 187 relay output word data parameter 101 status words data parameters 104 values data 101 feedback multiplier PID parameter 163 on ABB 309 select PID parameter 163 field weakening point 271 fieldbus see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters fieldbus adapter see FBA see FBA drive parameters fieldbus embedded see EFB see EFB drive parameters firmware panel 41 45 version 6
218. XT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the AI reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and AI for values 14 17 B Correcting reference AI for values 9 10 AI2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C 25 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis Parameters 5550 User s Manual 111 Code Description 1104 REF1 MIN A Ext ref Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in P1105 nem Hz rpm MAX Parameter 1301 MINIMUM 11 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signa
219. a dedicated bit 2 DEV OVERTEMP lOPEX LINK EFB 3 allocated within Fault Words See section Fault listing on page 244 3 SHORT CIRC PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW for a description of the faults 4 Reserved CURR MEAS USER LOAD CURVE The control panel displays the word 5 5C UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 Al LOSS ENCODER ERR Reserved 1in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 Al2LOSS IOVERSPEED Reserved 0306 FAULT WORD 2 8 MOTOVERTEMP Reserved Reserved Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 9 PANELLOSS DRIVE ID Reserved See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 10 ID RUN FAIL FILE System error Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error See parameter 0305 12 CB OVERTEMP EFB CON FILE System error 13 EXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param setting fault 0308 ALARM WORD 1 When an alarm is active the Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words 0 JOVERCURRENT OFF BUTTON Each alarm has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP allocated within Alarm Words 2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to 3 DIRLOCK Reserved the word 4 COMMLOSS 1 control panel displays the word hex
220. a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Liability limits The manufacturer is not responsible for Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties express or implied arising by operation of law or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The technical data information and
221. ady to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See the table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH bit 15 ito 2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 217 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ret ACTIVE ACTIVE 7 SW Bit4 0 Fault n f 0 I 0 From any
222. age 68 tells how to select up to three signals to output FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 If more than signals been selected to monitored see page 4 1 68 you can browse them in the Output mode REM a To browse the signals forward press key repeatedly To browse OUTPUT END them backward press key lt Y 2 repeatedly 0 5 A REM OUTPUT FWD 107 OUTPUT FWD Control panels 66 ACS550 User s Manual Reference mode In the Reference mode you can set the speed frequency or torque reference start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing gt Z repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom REM PA MENU FWD 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local Loc control by pressing display briefly shows LoC before switching PA to local control MENU FWD Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM 3 If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key LOC CA or Y 2 until you see
223. al signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example x1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Not used 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA T 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 719 AGND Analog output circuit common r 110 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all I 413 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive I 414 Dl2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction I 415 013 Reference up Activation increases the reference I 416 014 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 1015 Constant speed 1 1202 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DI4 23 ROZA lt j Default operation If both are active or inactive the 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 speed reference is unchanged 25 ROSE E RP n programmable The existing speed reference is efault operation 37
224. alue for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Parameters 114 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Defines timed function activated constant speed mode Timed function can be used to change between external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 and 4 1 EXT CS1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timed function is active selects Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active Selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 External reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 cs1 2 3 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed unction 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is active selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions are active TIMER1 2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 115 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS
225. alue of the fourth underload curve definition point 3715 De LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 ines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point 3716 De LOAD FREQ 5 ines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 De LOAD TORQ LOW 5 Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 ines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point 3718 De LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 ines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in the figure The parameter characteristics were as described below Ifthe load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by parameter 80 4 CUPS 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 1 70 obsolete the underload protection is activated 605 4 9 Curves 1 3 reach 99 maximum at the motor 40 rated frequency set by 4 A 30 parameter 9907 MOTOR 20 toa ap ieee NOM FREQ E 1 i Tw nominaltorque of the 0 i motor fn 24 1 fN nominal frequency of the motor If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two tables below Obsolete parameters New parameters Underload supervision wit
226. an in frame sizes R1 to R3 located at the top of the drive and R4 located in front of the drive 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs 4 When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that The fan air flow is up refer to the arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive 3AUA000000404 Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order aR gt Restore power Maintenance 258 Capacitors ACS550 User s Manual Reforming The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed re aged if the drive has been non operational for more than one year Without reforming capacitors may be damaged when the drive starts to operate It is therefore recommended to reform the capacitors once a year See section Serial number on page 13 for how to check the date of manufacture from th
227. and or noise on line 29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application 32 EFB 2 The meaning is protocol dependent 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTP WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software Sw Internal fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive Call support representative 37 CBOVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 Check for and correct Excessive ambient temperature Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Not for drives with an OMIO control board 38 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid CURVE l
228. and then press N Now the display F shows the current reference value with under the value MENU LOC Hz LI FWD 4 To increase the reference value press A LOC D 0 0 To decrease the reference value press Cw is The value changes immediately when you press the key It is stored in the END drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off Control panels ACS550 User s Manual Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can view and change parameter values select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode 67 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode LOC otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom F MENU FWD 2 If the panel is not in the Parameter mode not visible press key Loc or S Y 2 until you see and then press X The display PA r shows the number of one of the parameter groups MENU FWD 01 PAR FWD 3 Use keys and yw 2 to find the desired parameter group LOC 1 1 PAR FWD 4 Press lt J The display shows one of the parameters in the selected Loc group PAR FWD 5 Use keys gt and w 2 to find the desired parameter Loc 1 1 0 3 P
229. ation must be sent from the drives to the controlling System Fieldbus adapter 224 ACS550 User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation FBA WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview Mounting procedure 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Note Install the input power and motor cables first until the retaining clips lock the module into position Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module X00301 install the cable clamp for the network cable Route the network cable through the cable clamp connector 8 For configuration information see the following X00302
230. awings for ACS550 drives is located in ACS550 Technical Reference Manual Mounting dimensions W1 See detail 2 5 H1 See detail B b ALg Detail A Detail B X0032 IP21 UL type 1 and 54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size R1 R2 R3 I R4 R5 I R6 W11 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 6 3 160 6 3 238 94 263 10 4 w2 980 39 980 39 318 12 5 418 16 4 473 18 6 578 228 588 23 2 675 26 6 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 b 10 0 0 4 10 0 0 4 13 0 0 5 13 0 0 5 14 0 0 55 14 0 0 55 c 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 8 0 0 3 8 0 0 3 8 5 0 3 8 5 0 3 d 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 1 Center to center dimension Technical data 5550 User s Manual 287 Outside dimensions Drives with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures pep H H2 Q X0031 IP21 UL type 1 dimensions for each frame size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ref n mm In mm In mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 4 9 125 49 203 8 0 203 8 0 267 10 5 302 11 9 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 3 596 23 5 602 23 7 700 27 6 H2 315 12 4 415 16 3 478 18 8 583 23 0 578 22 8 698 27 5 H3 369 14
231. bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 pcs OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 0 y L L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON ie OFF MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 I 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 C D NOT READY 0 SWITCH on SW 0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW 1 x110 OPERATION READY TO 40 SW Bit0 1 ere INHIBITED switcH SW 8101 OPERATION INHIBITED CWE 1 xxxx x111 gt BCD READY TO OPERATE SW Bate CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION a C D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 lt 1 CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx 1 xxx1 1111 gt ENABLED ag B lt CW DISSE CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 KEY gt State State change ACCELERATOR CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD C lt Function Generator x1xx x111 1111 Param 0104 CURRENT SW Bit8 1 f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING n Speed D lt Fieldbus adapter 236 Reference ACS550 User s Manual As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Reference scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profil
232. bus Contact your ABB representative to order either braking unit or chopper and resistor When installing control wiring refer to the following chapters or sections as appropriate Control terminals table on page 22 Control connections on page 281 Application macros on page 71 Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 Embedded fieldbus on page 189 Fieldbus adapter on page 221 Installation 20 ACS550 User s Manual Power connection diagrams A The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals J1 DIP switches for analog inputs two types can be used Diagram shows the R3 frame Other frames have similar layouts Al1 in voltage position AI2 in current position Panel connector X1 Analog inputs and outputs and 10 V ref voltage output FlashDrop option X1 Digital inputs 24 V aux voltage output Power LED green Fault LED red X1 Relay outputs J2 DIP switch for RS485 termination J2 J2 Tm Optional module 1 X1 Communications rod A RS485 A ON ON i L i Optional module 2 position position I aaa 4 Power output to mo
233. bus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 AM Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 197 Feedback from the drive EFB Pre defined feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 201 Brive parameter Modbus protocol reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 SPEED 40102 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB CMD WOR
234. cause permanent damage to the drive Examples for using the table Requirements Checking and conclusions R1 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C2 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable du dt filter is needed Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C2 are met with a 150 m 490 ft cable R3 frame size 4 kHz fsw Category C3 300 m 980 ft cable Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz gt a 300 m 980 ft cable cannot be used even with du dt filter A sine filter must be used and the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the installation Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 are met with a 300 m 980 ft cable R5 frame size 8 kHz fsw Category C3 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R5 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient Check limits gt requirements for Category C3 cannot be met with a 300 m 980 ft cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation R6 frame size 4 kHz fsw EMC limits not applicable 150 m 490 ft cable Check operational limits for R6 and 4 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft cable the basic unit is sufficient EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC requirements Technical data 5550
235. cee Phase eee rins 43 outputmode 47 OVEIVIOW Soar glade aes 42 parameter backup mode 58 parameters 49 Soft Keysu u cases toe p Rer telle 42 Start Stop aa 46 status line LOC REM arrow 43 control panel 62 alarmi CodeS oei ec eve 253 Copy MOJE U de ae oda oe Fd 69 direction of rotation 62 64 fault mode 63 243 244 how to do common tasks 63 mainmenu 63 operation Ju u ane 63 output Mode sii i aa E 65 uya a ee PI 62 parameter 67 reference mode 66 start stop are u CA a 64 control word ABB drives FBA description 232 EFB description 209 29s RE OS 222 FBA generic 240 Index 5550 User s Manual cooling air TloW os lieto exc SS 283 fan maintenance triggers 139 heatloss ss iar dom x REPAS EET UE 283 space requirement 283 copy mode Basic Control Panel 69 corner grounded TN system 267 warning about filters 6 warning about screws at EM1
236. cesa eaae dele e bue Ee 293 CB see control board CE taking voe Rm ES 291 changed parameters Assistant Control Panel 54 chopper see braking clock setting Assistant Control Panel 56 communication see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters kit one per ene Ra EP ESQ 18 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 171 faultcode sueco ever Rr REO X 247 id revision 171 revision 171 connections ERI phew Pete yam 22 Bee DES us asua ae 22 EFB COMM 555552525545 avs ym bod xx 190 FBA module 224 Xdi cedat tee Bik NU Be etta 22 constant speed See speed constant construction code 13 contamination levels environment limit 289 shipping limit 289 contrast control panel Assistant 48 control connection specifications 281 location data parameter 100 terminal specifications 282 through I O 38 ACS550 User s Manual control board overtemperature fault code 247 overtemperature fault parameter 142 temperature data parameter 102 control cable COMNECHIONS
237. circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm 10 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be gt 10 V or 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the M ACS550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 5 e 13 D1 Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop w 14 012 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev a 15 Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16 DIA Digital input 4 programmable Default2 constant speed code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default2 ramp pair selection code 18 DI6 Digital input 6 programmable Default2 not used Installation 5550 User s Manual 23 1 Hardware description 19 RO1C 4 Relay output 1 programmable Defau t 20 Maximum 250 VAC 30VDC 2A Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 21 1 _ o El 22 ROC Relay output 2 programmable Defau t Running 3 23 RO2A Maximum 250 VAC 30VDC 2A gt Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B _ o 25 4 Relay output 3 programmable Defau t Fault 1 26
238. connect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 6 Restore power Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the fan R5 Swing the fan out on its hinges R6 Pull the fan out Arrows in the fan show the directions of the x0022 rotation and air flow Maintenance ACS550 User s Manual 257 Internal enclosure fan replacement IP54 UL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure f
239. constant speed motor 418 DI6 Start Stop Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 RO1A Default operation The sensor needs to be powered 21 RO1B L5 Running gt 19 connected to 21 the manufacturer s instructions 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable connection example of a two wire y output prog sensor is shown on page 80 23 RO2A 1 Default operation 24 RO2B Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A A Default operation 27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog ref and actual 2 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Start stop manual PFC 011 6 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 o gt 0 10 V Run enable 012 Relay output 1 Running q 9 p 12 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection 013 Relay output 2 Fault 1 or Interlock 014 5 Relay output 3 Aux motor ON J1 1 0 10 V N AI2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros 5550 User s Manual Torque Control macro 79 This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor Control can also be switched to speed control To enable set the value of
240. cts either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE AT 4007 value Entry Display Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values 0003 3 Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry See the table for example using pi 3 14159 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 13 14 3 3142 13 142 Parameters 162 5550 User s Manual Code Description 4008 0 VALUE Units 4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 1000 0 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 n and 0132 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 4007 P 4009 mr I 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values P4008 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 2 l gt AS 0 100 1000 0 Internal scale 4010 SET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller
241. d 100 Gain 1 Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is achieved in 1 second 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds See 4001 for adjustment procedure B D P 4001 10 P 4001 1 lt 4002 Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 4003 DERIVATION TIME Defines the PID controller s derivation time You add the derivative of the error to the PID controller output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 Derivation time seconds Error 4 Process error value 100 t PID output A D part of controller output Gain_ P 4001 t 4 4003 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter e Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Sele
242. d 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 011 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 011 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay 014 Third Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor 011 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay 014 Fourth PFC Relay 015 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed 011 First Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay 014 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Parameters 182 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 0
243. d regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Code Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Example An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 096 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Parameters 176 5550 User s Manual Code Description 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2
244. d then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors ACS550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the spee
245. details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 Exr1 COMMANDS 10 Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits 0 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits 0 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded fieldbus 194 ACS550 User s Manual Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below
246. does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded fieldbus 200 ACS550 User s Manual Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 243 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent off line occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACS550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by marginally loose connections wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 201 Modbus protocol technical data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable contro
247. drive C EFB 197 Diagriostics ERB or ec YS ADR HR Suma Rer RUP pates 198 Modbus protocol technical data 201 ABB control profiles technical data 209 Fieldbus adapter 221 Planning 223 Mechanical and electrical installation FBA 224 Communication set up 225 Activate drive control functions FBA 225 Feedback from the drive 228 Diagnostics FBA eom ob usa aqa a 229 ABB Drives profile technical data 232 Generic profile technical data 240 Diagnostics see et ont e ea td 243 Correcting AUS Tu u l ee S pad ee de ha 244 Correcting alarms 54 1 ie aa ae Sates sa 250 Maintenance Maintenance 5 255 Heatsink metier u yas Rau Ae efie iay q em uhu ati W aa aqa 255 Main fan replacement 256 Internal enclosure fan replacement 257 Capacitors r uz y doe kee 258 Control panel
248. e ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks type REF1 32767 Speed 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 1 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 par 50 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient input signal 100
249. e De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DI1 INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Sets the first minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Sets the second minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 127 Code Description 2017 IMAX TORQUE 1 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 IMAX TORQUE 2 Sets the second maximum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters 128 5550 User s Manual Group 21 START STOP This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACS550 supports several start and stop modes Code Description 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode Vector control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note
250. e parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 7 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems 3024 CB TEMP FAULT Defines the drive response to control board overheating Not for drives with an OMIO control board 0 DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 143 Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Code Description 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial more time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control panel or from source selected 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x x x 9192 TRIAL TIME x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting
251. e rating Serial number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture YY Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 Installation 14 ACS550 User s Manual Motor compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this Type code label on drive entry for Output ong range 0 2 2 0 long or long drive heavy duty Type code on drive and rating table in chapter current Technical data on page 259 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with 208 240 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 2 or the ACS550 voltage range 380 480 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 4 500 600 V for ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives For ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 the motor complies with NEMA MG1 Part 31 or a du dt filter is used between the motor and drive Tools required To install the ACS550 you need the following screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill for installations involving ACS550 U1 frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 UL type 12 enclosures punch for creating condu
252. e serial number shown on the drive labels For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 150 350 550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Replacement The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Control panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function except the clock Maintenance 5550 Use
253. e source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input 011 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 INV above Drive started START STOP COMMAND Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Parameters 1608 amp 1609 Relay energized Relay STARTED de energized RELAY STATUS 14 a gt STATUS Damper i Damper opening I closing time time ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the
254. e table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Set parameters Language select Selecting the language 9901 Motor set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are notin 9910 the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1103 EXT1 If 11 is used Setting analog input 11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the speed frequency limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 2202 2203 Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106 EXT2 If 11 is used Setting analog input 11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Torque control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106 If 11 is used Setting analog input 11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp d
255. edures 11 TOOLS 1 6 d act rec amia qatun CHE 14 wiring overvieW 18 insulation check 24 ACS550 User s Manual integration time PID parameter 161 integration time parameter 133 interlocks parameter 181 internal setpoint PID parameter 163 IR compensation frequency parameter 137 137 voltage 137 isolation between power source drive 263 IT system Gonneclians AS os 268 warning about filters 6 276 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 20 warning about screws at F1 F2 21 J jogging activation parameter 108 K keypad see control panel keypad reference select parameter 109 kWh counter data parameter 100 intake energy data parameter 103 L label serial 12 lypscode Ye EGR ES REY EV 12 language parameter 98 LED on Assistant Control Panel 42 243 244 on drive 20 243 244 liability limifs 294 limits parameter 125 load curve see user load curve load frequency see user load curve load torque see
256. ee Analog input reference correction below 10 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as 0130 4 above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 1 12 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Changing the control source EXT1 to E
257. eel patens ER s os 295 PE earth earth fault parameter 141 PE earth connection terminal 268 lorgue ise v e Pu CERE 268 PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage 23 PFC control parameter group 175 acceleration time parameter 186 aux start order parameter 186 aux motor start delay parameter 177 aux motor stop delay parameter 177 deceleration time parameter 186 enable parameter 185 low frequency parameters 177 uci PME 78 number of aux motors parameter 178 number of motors parameter 186 reference step parameters 175 start delay parameter 185 start frequency parameters 176 Index 5550 User s Manual PID process sets parameter groups external trimming parameter group 0 actual signal parameter 100 actual signal parameter actual input select parameters actual value max parameters actual value min parameters adjustment procedure comm value 1 data parameter comm value 2 data parameter control macro correction source parameter decimal point actual signal parameter derivation filter parameter derivation time parameter deviation
258. el using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See 011 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to LOC mode NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive 1 011 Defines digital input D11 as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enable the LOC selection
259. equency value of the first load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD HIGH 1 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3708 LOAD LOW 2 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD HIGH 2 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD HIGH 3 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point Parameters 5550 User s Manual 157 Code Description 3713 De LOAD FREQ 4 Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 ines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point 3714 De LOAD TORQ LOW 4 Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 ines the torque v
260. er otherwise as a PID controller figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Gain 1 Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time gt 0 Ts Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples e Error value Parameters 134 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2304 ACC COMPENSATION Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation 4 Speed reference Actual speed t gt Note You use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation t 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load
261. er s Manual LOC UPAR EDIT 9910 ID RUN 0 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Loc U 50 OHZ 0 0 Hz 0 0 A 0 0 DIR 00 00 MENU LOC U ALARM ALARM 2019 ID run 00 00 LOC U FAULT FAULT 11 ID RUN FAIL 00 00 9910 FwD Loc 1 PAR FwD Loc 00 us OUTPUT FwD 2019 FWD lt F0011 FwD Start up control with I O and ID Run 5550 User s Manual 41 Control panels About control panels Use a control panel to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two different control panel types Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 62 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant Control Panel This panel described below includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following panel versions Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev K Assistant Control Panel Area 1 ACS CP A Rev Y Assistant Control Panel Area 2 ACS CP L Rev E Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev M See page 45 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to see the
262. er s Manual Actual values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer when negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 197 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception code Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACS550 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 209 ABB control profiles technical data Overview ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the
263. errors Parameters 5550 User s Manual 173 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus See chapter Embedded fieldbus page 189 Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 1 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profi
264. ers are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED Not used Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual 253 Alarm Dus code Display Description 2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER CURVE LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Alarm codes Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code A5xxx The following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions Code Description 5001 Drive is not responding 5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive 5010 The panel s parameter backup file is corrupted 5011 Drive is controlled from another source 5012 Rotation direction is locked 5013 Button is disabled because start is inhibited 5014 Button is disabled because drive is faulted 5015 Button is disabled because local mode lock is on 5018 Parameter default value can t be found 5019 Writing a non zero value is prohibited can only write a zero value
265. es and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 81 and then uploaded to panel copy USER 52 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 70 ACS550 User s Manual How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt J if you are in the Output mode Loc otherwise by pressing gt Z repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom PA r MENU WD 2 If the panel is not in the Copy mode not visible press key AS LOC or amp w 2 until you see CoPY C O PY MENU n db u 1 MENU 3 upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control Loc panel step to uL with keys A and Cw L MENU FW Press WD During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa 0 L 5 0 percentage of completion u FwD perform
266. es digital input 011 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See 011 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection Timed function de activated PID Set 1 Timed function activated PID Set 2 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a larger difference positive difference a setpoint higher than the feedback is always larger than a negative difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a smaller difference A negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback bel
267. et to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 PAR Signal 1 parameters 3406 1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3473 OUTPUT2 3414 OUTPUT2 B He Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX PAR Control panels 5550 User s Manual 69 Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target driv
268. et up Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys A vw and press lt to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant Note At any time if you press 252 the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode REM U CHOICE Do you want to use the start up assistant NO EXIT 00 00 REM CHOICE Show start up assistant_on next boot No 00 00 REM PAR EDIT 9901 LANGUAGE ENGLISH 0 EXIT 00 00 SAVE REM PAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE Start up control with I O and ID Run 5550 User s Manual 37 After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the REM CHOICE Do you want to next one continue with Press lt when is highlighted to continue with the gt uagatign setup suggested task Press key lt to highlight and then press lt to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press EZ to stop the Start up Assistant SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK Skip EXIT 00 00 OK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on
269. ex 1 0 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 3304 DRIVE RATING 3305 TABLE 0000 hex 1 Par table version Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3402 sIGNAL1 MIN 1 3403 sIGNAL1 MAX 1 3404 ouTPUT DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0 127 1 3406 oUTPUT1 MIN 1 3407 1 1 3408 sIGNAL2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN 1 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX 1 3411 oUTPUT2 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3412 oUTPUT2 UNIT 0 127 1 3413 oUTPUT2 MIN 1 3414 oUTPUT2 MAX 1 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 105 parameter 0105 ITORQUE 3416 sIGNAL3 MIN 1 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX 1 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3419 oUTPUT3 UNIT 0 127 1 3420 oUTPUT3 MIN 1 3421 oUTPUT3 1 Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 0 NONE 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 A11 3503 ALARM LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 110 C 1500 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 3504 FAULT LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 130 C 4000 ohm 0 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 3601 5 ENABLE 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 25 00 00 00 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 0
270. fault 142 installation nir Ae Sei 24 installation steps IP21 cables 25 installation steps IP21 conduit 26 installation steps IP54 cables 27 installation steps IP54 conduit 28 OVerVIeW RES NUS 18 requirements 18 XYZ zero pulse detected data parameter 102 enable parameter 170 delay parameter 130 load fault parameter 141 ACS550 User s Manual Index Contact ABB Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type code and serial number of the drive in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Drives World wide service contacts on the right pane Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Drives Train ing courses on the right pane Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives then select successively Drives Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives on the right pane 3AUA0000001418 Rev F EFFECTIVE 4 16 2007 SUPERSEDES 3AUA0000001418 Rev E 12 6 2004 ABB Oy AC Dri
271. ff The motor stops Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly See section ABB Standard macro on page 72 In remote control the panel display shows text REM STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR REM OUTPUT Hz 00 FwD REM OUTPUT 500 FwD E MOTOR REM OUTPUT 500 REM OUTPUT 500 FwD REM OUTPUT 00 FwD Hz Start up control with I O and ID Run 5550 User s Manual 39 How to perform the ID Run The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using identification magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter Group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 OFF IDMAGN and parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run 9910 ID RUN 1 oN The ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required Note If motor parame
272. fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 201 Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209 Miscellaneous drive control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 comm Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 comm Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply
273. frequency The curve is defined by five points Code Description 3701 USER LOAD MODE Motor torque Supervision mode for the user adjustable load curves A This functionality replaces the former underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS P3706 P3709 lemulate it see section Correspondence with the P38 lobsolete underload supervision on page 157 P3714 P3717 0 NOT SEL Supervision is not active 1 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque i dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve P3705 BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping i below the underload curve or exceeding the 1 overload curve P3708 oe T T T T T P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P371 Output frequency Hz Overload area Allowed operating area Underload area 3702 USER LOAD FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD TIME Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the fr
274. g repeatedly until you get to the Main menu 5 5515 5 CHANGED 00 00 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC U COPY MENU 1 i UPLOAD TO PANEL A and SY 2 and pressing lt DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER 5 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select BACKUP INFO on the Copy menu with keys and w 2 and LOC UBACKUP press lt The display shows the following information about the drive where DRIVE the backup was made 2294 PRIVE RATING i DRIVE TYPE type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE DRIVE RATING rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where EXIT 00 00 XXX nominal current rating If present an A indicates 5665 E BACKUP INFO a decimal point e g 4A6 means 4 6 A Y 2 200V 3304 DRIVE RATING 4 400 V h _ F hex 6 600 V EXIT 00 00 Z i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys and w 2 4 LOC U COPY MENU 1 Press to return to the menu BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER EXIT 00 00 SEL Control panels 5550 User s Manual Settings mode In the Settings mode you can check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal 61 edit the parameter se
275. g profiles EFB proportional gain parameter 139 305 protection circuit required w chopper 280 disconnecting device disconnecting means 263 enclosure standard 291 289 motor 273 PT100 temperature 151 temperature 151 R radiation limits conducted 61800 3 275 ramp pair accel decel parameter 131 range listing for parameters 85 aera e TREE 259 reference select parameter 109 corrections for parameter values 110 keypad control parameter 109 maximum parameters 111 minimum 111 mode Basic Control Panel 66 select source parameter 109 step PFC parameters 175 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 218 FBA ABB drives profile 236 FBA generic 240 reference setting Assistant Control Panel 48 Basic Control 66 regulator by pass control parameter 185 relative humidity environment 289 shipping limit
276. ggers 139 nominal current parameter 99 nominal frequency parameter 99 nominal power parameter 99 nominal speed parameter 99 nominal voltage parameter 98 phase fault code 247 requirements 14 stall 246 thermal 273 motor cable checking 24 length 400 V 4 272 600 Vdrives 273 AX leriglhiz apun aaah phe 271 requirements 274 requirements EMC 274 motor connection lugs Tor RB E ne See Eee EORR 269 terminal 268 Torque oo ll ss L ya ae A eae aed 268 motor control parameter 137 control mode parameter 98 IR compensation parameters 137 motor potentiometer 75 motor temperature measure parameter group 150 alarm limit parameter 151 data parameter 102 fault limit parameter 151 overtemperature fault code 245 sensor selection parameter 151 sensor type parameter 151 thermal protection 273 thermal protection fault parame
277. gnal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control panel cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable Drive s control connection terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame size Maximum wire size 1 Torque mm AWG N m Ib ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 1 Values given for solid wires For stranded wires the maximum size is 1 mm Efficiency Approximately 9896 at nominal power level Technical data 5550 User s Manual Cooling 283 Cooling specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Requirement Free space above and below the ACS550 drive 200 mm 8 in Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACS550 drives can be mounted side by side Air flow 208 240 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 V drives
278. gnal values or bar graphs see DIR 00 00 MENU DIR 00 00 MENU page 50 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press repeatedly until you get there REM 49 1HZ 49 1 Hz 0 5 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC 49 1HZ control by pressing 9 display briefly shows message about changing 49 1 Hz the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To change the direction from forward tu shown on the status line to reverse 5 LOC 3 WATA shown on the status line or vice versa press EZ 49 amp 1 HZ 0 5 10 7 Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST DIR 00 00 MENU Control panels 48 5550 User s Manual How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press repeatedly until you get there REM U 49 1 2 49 1 Hz 0 5 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is remote control REM shown the status line switch to local Loc v 49 1HZ control by pressing display briefly shows message about changing 49 amp 1 HZ the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0
279. h 3013 3014 3701 3702 3703 parameters 3013 3015 obsolete UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD FUNCTION TIME C MODE C FUNC C TIME No underload functionality 0 0 Underload curve fault generated 1 t 1 1 t Underload curve alarm generated 2 t 1 2 2t Parameters 158 ACS550 User s Manual Obs par 3015 3704 3705 3707 3708 3710 3711 3713 3714 3716 3717 UNDER LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD FREQ 1 TORQ FREQ 2 TORQ FREQ3 FREQ4 TORQ FREQS5 TORQ CURVE Low 1 Low 2 Low 3 Low 4 Low 5 Hz H Hz Hz Hz EU US EU US EU US EU US EU US 10 32 38 17 41 50 23 50 60 30 500 500 30 20 31 37 30 42 50 40 50 60 50 50 50 50 30 31 37 43 42 5 57 50 60 70 50 50 70 10 73 88 17 98 117 23 120 144 30 500 500 30 20 71 86 30 99 119 40 120 144 50 500 500 50 New parameters Q A wl N gt aj aj Q Q Ct Parameters ACS550 User s Manual Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID controller Basic set up 159 In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automaticall
280. hange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts he H Relay logic ACS550 A PFC with Autochange mode Parameters 180 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the drive s ou
281. he controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 Drive parameter Protocol reference 0102 SPEED 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 0 STOP 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 2 REV 0118 pi 1 3 STATUS bit 0 013 Scaling To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections as appropriate Actual Value scaling on page 239 ABB Drives profile technical data Actual Value scaling on page 241 Generic profile technical data Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual Diagnostics FBA Fault handling The ACS550 provides fault information as follows 229 The control panel display shows fault code and text See chapter Diagnostics on page 243 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See the table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification Fo
282. he drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected screws EM1 amp EM3 or F1 amp F2 removed The drive is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power mains fuses are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Installation 30 Reinstall the cover IP21 UL type 1 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 Reinstall the control panel 4 Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O ID Run on page 31 IP54 UL type 12 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover 3 Slide the hood down over the top of the cover Only needed for UL type 12
283. he same specifications See section Drive s power connection terminals on page 268 Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick compliance Minimum requirement CE amp C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable screen for example MCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Inner insulation CHUA g ZZ Technical data 5550 User s Manual 275 Recommendation for conductor layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE amp C Tick Allowed CE amp C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield conductor and shield 6 2 Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE amp C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase I conductor cross section up to 10 mm2 ZS o Effective m
284. he state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Name Value Commanded Comments state 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL z n 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL aan a 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP OUT _ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB DRV FULL 0 OUT ZERO
285. igital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input 012 016 See above 7 011 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 011 and 012 Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 DI activated 011 012 Function 0 0 constant speed 1 0 speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 1204 be set up as so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 012 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 012 and 013 See above 011 2 for code 9 013 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 See above 011 2 for code 10 014 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 014 and 015 See above 011 2 for code 11 015 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 015 and DI6 See above 011 2 for code 12 011 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 011 012 and 013 Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 pi de activated 1 activated g 9 Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206
286. ime constant specification must be gt 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols Ruin Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary Technical data 280 ACS550 User s Manual P Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where x is ONmax time Installing and wiring resistors A All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat WARNING The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See section Power connection diagrams on page 20 for the resistor cable connection points Mandatory circuit protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contac
287. ime period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale Parameter 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Parameter 4005 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Wake up level can be above or below setpoint See the figures C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up 4026 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEV for at least this time period re starts the PID controller P 4023 B pod tik P 4026 Setpoint i 405 RURAL iie t gt P Stop Start Setpoint 4025 Setpoint P 4025 D t gt lt P 4026 Parameters 166 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters PID set 1 and PID set 2 PID set 1 uses parameters 4001 4026 PID set 2 uses parameters 4101 4126 PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected 0 5 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 011 Defin
288. imit is defined in Group 20 LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input Torque 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used Current 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME Stall region The drive coasts to stop 95 A fault indication is displayed 2 ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME An alarm indication is displayed The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME User limit 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 3011 This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Stall frequency the figure 3012 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3017 EARTH FAULT Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop Parameters 142 5550 User s Manual Code Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost NOT SEL No
289. imum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in 96 Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM 11 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Parameters 112 5550 User s Manual Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS This group defines set of constant speeds general You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 lt FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code Description 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 D
290. ine voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors WARNING Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage WARNING Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor connection specifications Motor connection specifications Voltage U2 0 U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency resolution 0 01 Hz Current See section Ratings on page 259 Field weakening point 10 500 Hz Switching frequency Selectable See the availability in the table below 1 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 380 480 V All types except for Frame sizes R1 R4 ACS550 01 246A 4 only 1 ACS550 01 087A 4 4 kHz and ACS550 U1 097A 4 500 600 V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Maximum motor cable length See sections Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 and Motor cable length for 600 V drives on page 273 Technical data 272 ACS550 User s Manual Motor cable length for 400
291. ines one speed range Speed range allowed Time See the figure 0 gt 2001 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is gt 0 Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed P 2002 Speed range allowed P 2001 0 2001 Speed range allowed P 2002 2003 IMAX CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Note If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to 0 DISABLE to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrif
292. ing or Run enable 014 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 1 0 10 V 7 Al2 0 4 20 mA Application 5550 User s Manual PID Control macro 77 This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting OFF Connection example x1 1 10 kohm41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 V IN 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 3 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt speed reference 5 2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID 0 10V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint lt q 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA q 8 2 Output current 0 20 mA 719 AGND Analog output circuit common Note 3 sensor needs to powered 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 See the manufacturer s instructions 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connection example of a two wire 12 DCOM Digital input common for all sensor is shown on page
293. inputs Function code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACS550 Remarks reference all profiles 30001 AI This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 12 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACS550 supports the following Mod Function code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status bus function codes for 3xxxx registers 4xxxx Register mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows 40001 40099 to drive control and actual values These registers described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded fieldbus 206 ACS550 User s Manual The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter
294. installations 4 Install the two screws that attach the hood Only needed for UL type 12 installations 5 Install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with 54 UL type 12 ACS550 User s Manual ww FM 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window 7 Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 31 Installation 5550 User s Manual 31 Start up control with I O and ID Run The chapter instructs how to perform the start up start stop change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface perform an Identification Run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels starting on page 47 How to start up the drive How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have f you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform the guided start up on page 36 or perform a limited start up see section How to perform the limited start up on page 31 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done
295. ion gt rosenn HE oe eA US y x 58 TON E s hoa Ya wa Kees Luke 58 se ersetS San uyu 58 drive EFB comm installation 190 FBA module installation 224 id fault code 247 MOUNLNG s issus 17 mounting dimensions 286 outside 287 rating parameter 146 temperature data parameter 100 Weight ee AT yeu 288 drive on time data parameters 102 E earth fault fault code Loo e Elec te ss 246 parameter ls bee lai e emma es 141 earthing see ground Index 300 EFB embedded fieldbus 189 actual value scaling 197 actual 197 analog output control activate 195 comm fault response 196 configuration 192 configure for loss of communication 199 control interface 189 control word ERAN S 209 2542552 Rak donee DU 198 drive control of functions activate 193 exception codes 208 fault code 28 22 551 Rex E 200 faul Gode 31 gt c vends meh 200 fault code 32 200 fault code 33 Led WARE EUER 200 fault tracing parameters 198 fault duplicate stations 199 fault intermittent off line
296. ionary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation Name of the current mode mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state e g PAR EDIT 4 Reference value Reference value in the Output mode or number of the Number of the highlighted item e g mode selected item parameter group or fault Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the and cw arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Clock Set Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics Control panels 44 In
297. irective defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The product standard 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 293 C Tick marking drive carries marking C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Technical data 292 ACS550 User s Manual Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 293 UL CSA markings 5 LISTED An UL mark is attached to ACS550 drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of UL 508C A CSA mark is attached to ACS550 U1 type drives to verify that the drive follows the provisions of C22 2 NO 14 The ACS550 is suitable for use o
298. is 80 100 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and if the drive is not provided with the RoHS marking the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Technical data 5550 User s Manual 291 Applicable standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type code label Mark Applicable standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
299. it mounting holes for installations involving ACS550 U1 frame size R6 appropriate crimping tool for power cable lugs See section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame size Mounting hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 R6 M8 5 16 in Suitable environment and enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See section Ambient conditions on page 289 Installation 5550 User s Manual 15 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level IP21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as dripping water condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions If for some reason an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or cover or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood see the note in chapter Technical data page 292 Suitable mounting location Confirm that the mounting location meets the fo
300. itch off delay for relay 5 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 See 1 OFF DELAY Parameters 5550 User s Manual 119 Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the Source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output filtered Code Description 1501 1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output 1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type Output 7 1 6 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 100 PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 101 159 Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN mA Sets the minimum content value 1505 1 Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1511
301. ited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual 241 Actual Value scaling For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 85 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Feedback integer Parameter resolution Parameter resolution integer Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 196 10 0 196 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter list section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 10096 and divide by 100 For example Feedback Parameter Value of the Feedback integer Parameter resolution integer resolution parameter that Value of 100 ref 100 9 defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907
302. itially the panel the Output mode where start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu The status line see section Status line on page 43 shows the name of the current menu mode item or state How to do common tasks ACS550 User s Manual Loc v 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU ASSISTANTS LOC UMAIN MENU T PARAMETERS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to get help Any 45 How to find out the panel version At power up 45 How to adjust the display contrast Output 48 How to switch between local and remote control Any 46 How to start and stop the drive Any 46 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 47 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Output 48 How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 49 How to select the monitored signals Parameters 50 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants 51 with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters 54 How to view
303. ition can be set by a Z pulse input if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE e parameter 5011 POSITION RESET if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 2 DISABLE any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0147 MECH REVS A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft The value increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0 decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767 0148 Z PLS DETECTED Encoder zero pulse detector When a Z pulse defines the zero position the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z pulse Until then the shaft position is unknown the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid The parameter starts at 0 NOT DETECTED on power up and changes to 1 DETECTED only if parameter 5010 2 PLS ENABLE 7 1 ENABLE and an encoder Z pulse has been detected 0150 TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives always show the constant value of 25 0 C Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 103 Code Description 0151 INPUT KWH R Calculated actual intake energy in kwh 0152 INPUT MWH Calculated actual intake energy in MWh 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for P
304. ive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Corner grounded TN systems WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Corner grounded TN systems are defined in the following table In such systems disconnect the internal ground connection by removing the screws do this also if the grounding configuration of the system is unknown ACS550 01 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove both the 1 and EMG screws see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 ACS550 U1 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove the 1 screw drive is shipped with EM3 removed see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F1 and F2 screws see section Power connection diagrams page 21 Corner grounded TN systems EM1 EMG F1 and F2 must be Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg L2 L3 Single phase 11 Three phase grounded at an Variac without end point solidly grounded neutral N The screws M4x16 make an internal ground connection that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is concern and the system is symmetrically grounded the screws may be installed For reference the diagram on the right illustrates a symmetrically grounded TN system Technical data 268
305. l e These parameters reference and analog min and max I settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the 1104 12 Analog 1105 IREF1 MAX MIN 1 input signal Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 P 1302 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full or 1304 or 1305 the signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm Ext ref Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal P 1104 MIN 1105 Analog T gt P 1301 P1302 inputsignal or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 20 21 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID1 gt REF2 LIMIT is used 797 SELECT MAX 1107 1108 PFC u 20 21 1107 1108 1107 2 Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in 96 Parameter 1301 MINIMUM 11 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed max
306. l inputs see parameter 1605 Note Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter sets When the motor is changed only the corresponding user parameter set needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros 82 ACS550 User s Manual Macro default values for parameters Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list on page 85 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables Note There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz IEC compliance 5550 01 and 60 2 compliance 5550 01 ACS550 01 5 3 5 e s 5 sg Parameter a 529 5 8 8 fe lt S 5 s S a 8 o s LL a 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR C
307. larm 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section Alarm listing on page 250 No The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled 1611 PARAMETER VIEW Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 LOAD FD SET DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists are shown 1 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list is shown Does not include short parameter list Parameters that are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 125 Group 20 LIMITS This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Code Description 2903 SPEED Speed 2001 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed P 2002 A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative gt A negative minimum speed value def
308. le 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS Contains the status of the EFB protocol IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Parameters 174 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5311
309. le by 01 or U1 Refer to the type code on the drive for example ACS550 01 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 START UP DATA 9901 LANGUAGE 0 15 0 3 1 0 ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 8 31 1 1 ABB STANDARD v 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 2 VECTOR TORQUE 1 3 SCALAR FREQ v SCALAR FREQ 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 115 345 V 1V 230 V v 01 200 600 V 1V 01 400 V v U1 230 690 V U1 460 V U1 288 862 V 1V U1 575V v 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 long 2 0 long 0 1A 1 0 gt long v 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz v U1 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent v 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 00 2 3 0 Pha 01 0 1 kW 1 0 Pha v U1 0 1 hp 9910 D RUN OFF IDMAGN 1 1 0 OFF IDMAGN v Group 01 OPERATING DATA 0101 SPEED amp DIR 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0103 ourPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 2 0 1 2 0104 CURRENT 0 0 2 0 long 0105 TORQUE 200 0 200 0 0 1 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 Pha 0 1 kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 TA 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 1V 0110 DRIVE 0 0 150 09 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 0113 CTRL L
310. llers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII RTU The ACS550 supports RTU only Feature summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550 Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g 1 33 Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers
311. llowing constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see section Outside dimensions on page 287 plus air flow space around the drive see section Cooling on page 283 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See section Motor connection specifications on page 271 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See section Weight on page 288 Installation 16 ACS550 User s Manual Installing the drive Prepare the mounting location Remove the front cover IP21 UL type 1 1 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of 1 WARNING Before installing the ACS550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the requirements defined in section Preparing for installation on page 72 are met the mounting template provided with the drive X0002 Drill the holes Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting h
312. lue of the drive s run time counter When parameter 2905 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter When parameter 2907 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter Parameters 140 5550 User s Manual Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Defines the drive response if the analog input A signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 A11 LOSS or 8 AI2 Loss and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST
313. m value of lna or Set parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical data ACS550 User s Manual Input power connections 263 WARNING Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input power specifications Input power mains connection specifications Voltage 04 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 10 for 5550 1 2 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase 15 10 for 5550 1 4 500 525 575 600 V AC 3 15 10 for ACS550 U 1 xxxx 6 Prospective short circuit current Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA providing that the input power cable of the drive is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power factor cos phi 0 98 at nominal load Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Disconnecting device for isolation Install a hand operated input disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to
314. mA 1512 FILTER AO2 0 0 10 05 0 15 0 15 Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL v 1602 PARAMETER LOCK LOCKED 1 OPEN 2 NOT SAVED 1 1 OPEN 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 0 KEYPAD 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 0 NOT SEL 1606 LOCK 6 8 1 0 NOT SEL 1607 SAVE 0 DONE 1 SAVE 1 0 DONE 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL v 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL v 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS NO 1 YES 1 0 NO 1611 PARAMETER VIEW DEFAULT 1 FLASHDROP 1 0 DEFAULT Group 20 LIMITS 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm rpm v 2002 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 01 1500 rpm v U1 1800 rpm 2003 CURRENT 1 8 long 1 8 long v 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 ENABLE TIME 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz v 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz v U1 60 0 Hz 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 MIN TORQUE 1 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 0 MAX TORQUE 1 2015 TORQUE 1 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 2018 TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Group 21 START STOP 2101 START FUNCTION Vector control modes 1 2 8 1 8 RAMP v Scalar control mode
315. mands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through 011 and 012 combinations Start forward 011 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both 011 and 012 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Parameters 108 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 11 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 1 Timed Function activated START Timed Function de activated See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 14 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 2 4 See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external control location 2 ExT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command 10
316. means Note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run 2020 RESERVED Not used 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING Tocontrol Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING Tocontrol Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP 2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range Aworking and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor paramet
317. mments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 0 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 no op 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference r defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals control and the drive moves to fieldbus local 0 External mode control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 2 1 Switch to 2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded fieldbus 212 ACS550 User s Manual DCU profile CONTROL WoRD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 8 STPMODE EM 1 Emergency ramp stop mode no op 9 STPMODE_C Coast stop mode no op 10 2 pair 2 pair 1 11 RAMP OUT 0 Ramp output to 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD Ramp freeze no op 13 IN 0 input to 0 14 RREQ_LOCALL Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode no op 15 TORQLIM2 Torque limit pair 2 oj oO O gt O gt O gt O gt O gt oO Torque limi
318. most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 104 F the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Pha If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Technical data 262 ACS550 User s Manual Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required 15 4 0 80 19 25 Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see section Switching frequency derating on page 262 Referring to lzy in the ratings tables starting from page 259 the following drives exceed the requirement of 19 25 A ACS550 x1 023A 4 or 5550 1 024 2 Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C
319. motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run times 2 7 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays Parameters 5550 User s Manual 187 Group 98 OPTIONS This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Code Description 9802 COMM PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Parameters 188 ACS550 User s Manual Parameters 5550 User s Manual 189 Embedded fieldbus Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Iz Connect using either H standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbu
320. must be connected e Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive Accelerates the motor Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values Resets 2305 to Parameters 5550 User s Manual 135 Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL This group defines variables used for torque control operation Code Description 2401 UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time The minimum time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 2402 RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero Parameters 136 ACS550 User s Manual Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Code Description 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges Disables the critical speeds function 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are
321. n WARNING When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 IAR EXTERNAL FLT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Parameters 144 Group 32 SUPERVISION ACS550 User s Manual This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Code Description 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 OPERATING DATA 100 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected 101 159 Selects parameter 0101 0159 If the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO x HI Operating data supervisi
322. n In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp IP2001 Route both cables through the clamps power ground wire to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 0005 7 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen to the GND terminal 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s 10 11 12 13 14 15 Power motor cables and clamps not shown in the figure Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail X0006 Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and 22 analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive 14 end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires tothe F drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 11 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw IP2003 Installation 26 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with conduit 1 3 Install conduit gland box 6 Strip wires 7 Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive 10 11 12 13 Install thin wall c
323. n a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and for ACS550 U1 C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM RATE The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 289 for specific limits Note For open type enclosures i e drives without the conduit box and or cover for IP21 UL type 1 drives or without the conduit plate and or hood for IP54 UL type 12 drives the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with National Electric Code and local electrical codes Brake choppers when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built in brake chopper as standard equipment For frame sizes R3 R6 contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts See section Brake components on page 277 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions stands for Electromagnetic
324. n enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 LIMITS settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 LIMITS settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 1 Drive is running reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 2 1 Control is 2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 215
325. n in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE If you select the Start up Assistant it activates the first assistant which guides Do WANE to you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 continue with and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the setup next assistant or skip it select the appropriate answer with keys and Skip KCwZ and press lt If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks the EXIT 00 00 same question about the next assistant and so on 4 specify a new value press keys A and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT ask for information on the requested parameter press key 2 Scroll the help text with keys and w 2 Close the help by pressing e 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE LOC HELP Set as given on the motor nameplate Voltage value must correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 00 00 T Control panels 52 ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 5 To accept the new value continue to the setting of the next parameter LOC UPAR EDIT SAVE press SSE 9906 MOTOR_NOM CURR stop the assistant press eA 1 2 A EXIT 00 00 SAVE Th
326. n level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control and monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks REM OUTPUT 491 MENU PAL FwD The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to switch between local and remote control Any 64 How to start and stop the drive Any 64 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 64 How to browse the monitored signals Output 65 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Reference 66 How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 67 How to select the monitored signals Parameter 68 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 249 How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 7
327. n rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 REF 2 External reference REF2 in 96 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active control location Alternatives are LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 0114 RUN TIME R The drive s accumulated running time in hours h be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 101 Code Description 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs Status is displayed as a binary number 1 indicates that the input is activated LI 0 indicates that the input is deactivated 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS 011 Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS DI2 DI3 0120 AI 1 The relative value of analog input 1 in 96 0121 AI 2 The relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs 1 indicates that the relay is energized Oindicates that the relay is de energized LAE
328. nce scaling setting COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 n reae nS 1 1 I 1 1 100 1 I input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt eger 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1 1 10096 7 7 7 m pares input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 r gt Moe 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 1 1 1 1 t 100089 77 o7 7 1 I 1 Altinput signal 0 50 100 Embedded fieldbus 220 Reference handling ACS550 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Resultant ref ref ME 1 Fieldbus reference 163 100 100 163 ref 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Makrot eseeeceeccad Resultant ref Fieldbus 16396
329. ncrements or decrements the value Holding the key 1001 1 COMMANDS down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the DIL 2 displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 6 To save the new value press lt LOC SHOW I 0 1 To cancel the new value and keep the original press 00 5 5 1001 DIR El DI3 EXIT 00 00 Control panels 62 ACS550 User s Manual Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features numeric control panel with an LCD display function parameters be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel No Use 1 LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu ENE Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the
330. nction Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ 1 INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 7 RESET 0 gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled 0 CW 0 Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refanddeceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT SELECT Select external control location 1 1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bn Nama Value Correspond to Pisoni the state diagram 0 RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus adapter
331. nd as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 INV above Parameters 122 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and it does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 NOT SEL Defines the control pan
332. ng 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment Code Description Protocol reference Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Do not edit Any non zero value entered for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where XX protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link Set each drive on the network with a unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to 0 before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the Defines the communication
333. ng parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 3401 137 49 3408 138 __ O 3415 139 1 P 3404 P 3405 Loc t y l HZ DA 0 7 96 DIR 00 00 MENU LOC v us 50 100 SELECTED First parameter not displayed 101 159 Displays parameter 0101 0159 If parameter does not P 3404 0 4 A exist the display shows 24 4 DIR 00 00 MENU 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Displa Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 3407 for example to convert Group 01 OPERATING DATA parameter such as 0102 sPEED in 3407 rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values the corresponding land max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper 3406 units for the display Note Selecting units does convert values Parameter not I gt effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT P3402 P 3403 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Source value Defines the maximum expected value for the first
334. ngerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 RO3 WARNING When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply Safety P PP P bP pb ACS550 User s Manual WARNING If a drive whose internal EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive If a drive whose internal EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged Disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing EM1 and EMS screws frame size R1 R4 see the diagram in section Power connection diagrams on page 20 or F1 and F2 screws frame size R5 or R6 see the diagram on page 27 Also see sections systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals WARNING Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting means instead use the control panel start and stop keys lt gt and Q5 or commands via the
335. nglish RCAN 01 CANopen Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504231 English RCNA 01 ControlNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64506005 English RDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504223 English RETA 01 Ethernet Adapter User s Manual 3 64539736 English RLON 01 LonWorks Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE64798693 English RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504215 English Typical contents Safety Installation Programming Start up Diagnostics Technical data MAINTENANCE MANUALS Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 150 350 550 3AFE68735190 EN The Industrial wordmark and Product names in the form Drive are registered or pending trademarks of ABB CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org PROFIBUS DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG 5550 01 01 Drives 0 75 132 kW 1 200 User s Manual 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 Rev F EN EFFECTIV
336. nning and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length Adelta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 17 OBSOLETE Not used 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards Contact your local ABB representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase Blown fuse 23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct
337. nt minimum PID parameter 163 setpoint select PID parameter 162 shock stress 0 290 short circuit fault code 245 single phase supply connection s cessa usu SD SA Ra 18 geraling x nis ede se Ra 262 sleep selection PID parameter 164 slip compensation ratio parameter 138 soft keys Assistant Control Panel 42 specifications control 281 Input DOWER t 555552 e gc de 263 PAINS rh wos ods Shs 263 ACS550 User s Manual speed and direction signed data parameter 100 at fault history parameter 106 data 100 max limit 125 min limit 125 speed control parameter 133 acceleration compensation parameter 134 automatic tuning parameter 133 134 derivation time parameter 133 integration time parameter 133 proportional gain parameter 133 vector speed Mode 98 speed constant parameter groUp 112 digital input selection parameter 112 113 stall frequency fault parameter 141 function fault parame
338. ofile for each protocol e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic profile Reference Reference Range t Scaling Remarks Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed lim
339. ol panels 50 How to select the monitored signals ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 1 You select which signals monitored the Output mode how they LOC UPAR EDIT are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 49 for 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM detailed instructions on changing parameter values OUTPUT FREQ By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals 103 depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose CANCEL 00 00 SAVE default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the LOC UPAR EDIT default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively CURRENT To change the default signals select up to three signals from Group 01 104 OPERATING DATA to be shown CANCEE 00 00 SAVE Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of LOC UPAR EDIT the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE TORQU E Value 100 means that no signal is displayed 105 CANCEL 1 00 00 SAVE Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 2 Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar LOC
340. oles are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts Remove the control panel if attached 1P2000 Installation ACS550 User s Manual IP54 UL type 12 R6 R1 R5 1 If hood is present Remove screws ee 2 holding hood in place k 1e E i j 2 If hood is present Slide hood up and 1 off of the cover 3 Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover 4 Remove the cover Mount the drive IP21 UL type 1 1 Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top 2 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module IP54 UL type 12 For the IP54 UL type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots 1 As required for access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive 2 R5 amp R6 Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step 3 Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both side
341. on sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232 Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word can be used as speed or frequency reference e is a 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate Reference scaling on page 236 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 240 Generic profile technical data Actual Values Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Planning Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback inform
342. on control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DI1P 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands or pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse 011 Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input 012 In order to start he drive the digital input 013 must be activated during the pulse in 012 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input 016 016 activated Start 016 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input 015 015 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction com
343. on example of a two wire 23 RO2A M Default operation sensor is shown on page 80 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 connected 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references 11 2 Analog output 1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction 011 2 Analog output AO2 Current 2 11 0 10 V Speed torque control DI3 Relay output 1 Ready 9 p 12 0 4 20 mA Constant speed selection 014 Relay output 2 Running or Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 Run enable 016 o Al1 0 10 V Z AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros 80 Connection example of a two wire sensor ACS550 User s Manual Many applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 12 The macro wiring diagrams in this chapter show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor X1 control board 4 20 12 Process actual value measurement 6 AGND 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 1 control board 10 24 V Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 11 GND 24
344. on using relay outputs when LOSHI e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI lowest limit 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit 3203 making that limit active e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised
345. onduit clamps not supplied Connect conduit runs to box Route input power and motor wiring through conduits Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 78 must be separate conduit runs terminals 2004 Note For 5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm2 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 Route the control cable through the conduit must be separate from input power and motor conduit runs 2 0 10 screen into pig tail 12 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the 8 drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw IP2005 Installation 5550 User s Manual 27 Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with cables 1 Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and control cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive IP5003 On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual
346. onger than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 247 Diagnostics 248 ACS550 User s Manual Fault Fault name in Description and recommended corrective action code panel 101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB representative and report 199 the error number 201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local ABB representative and report the 299 error number UNKNOWN DRIVE TYPE 5550 SUPPORTED DRIVES X Wrong type of panel i e panel that supports drive X but not the ACS550 has been connected to the ACS550 Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range 50 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range 50 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range 50 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active 1002 RESERVED Not used
347. optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER 52 SAVE With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is speed reference in 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 2 VECTOR TORQ Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is torque reference in 100 is nominal torque 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Define
348. or power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1010 RESERVED 1011 Not used 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS 1015 RESERVED Not used 1016 PARUSERLOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 lt 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 lt 3710 LOAD FREQ lt 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 3718 LO
349. os arrow Assistant Control Panel 43 assistant Assistant Control Panel Start Lise sedis demde RUD ELS 51 TASKS ay ch po ous ace Hel RI 52 Assistant Control Panel see control panel Assistant assistants mode Assistant Control Panel 51 autochange interval parameter 179 level parameter 180 OVEIVIEW ul 180 starting order counter 180 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backing up parameters Assistant Control Panel 58 Basic Control 69 Basic Control Panel see control panel Basic Index 298 battery Assistant Control Panel 258 baud rate RS 232 parameter 172 braking Components er ER EN PES S 277 protection from overheated resistor 280 resistor heat dissipation 280 selecting brake choppers resistors 277 ex EE 280 break point frequency fault parameter 141 buffer overruns count parameter 172 cable requirements oio DEC 281 groundifid cose Seek ei lee eee 266 input POW T cicer ge ewer yaad REG es 265 motor 22 ss ae S ag tale ote Z 274 capacitor reforming 258 replacement 258 category IEC EN 61800 3 definition 2 xard ge CUBES 293 CO
350. otor cable screens The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s screen the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Inner insulator 12 L1 Braided metallic screen L3 EN 61800 3 compliant motor cables The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in section Effective motor cable screens on page 275 Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive Atthe motor end the motor cable screen must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor See section Motor cable length for 400 V drives columns limits on page 272 to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V drives for IEC EN 61800 3 compliance Technical data 276 ACS550 User s Manual A WARNING Do not use RFI EMC filters on IT systems Technical data ACS550 User s Manual 277 Brake components Availability Braking availability fo
351. ow setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input 011 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 INV above Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 167 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Code Description 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Parameters 168 ACS550 User s Manual Group 42 EXT TRIM PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 4221 See 4001 4021 4228 A
352. ow value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation e Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value e Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Parameters 5550 User s Manual 161 Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME Defines the PID controller s integration time Integration time is by definition the time required to increase the output by the error value Error value is constant an
353. own times 2401 2402 PID control Selecting the source for the process reference 1106 If 11 is used Setting analog input 11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed reference limits 2001 2002 2007 2008 Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 1001 1002 control locations 1 and 2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 Defining the direction control 1003 Defining the start and stop modes 2101 2103 Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601 Timed functions Setting the timed functions Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations 1001 1002 EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control 1102 Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 Control panels 5550 User s Manual 53 Name Description Set parameters Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output 1401 Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control 4027 Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Control panels
354. parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above LO HI Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of supervised parameter HI 3203 1 LO 3202 i Case k Energized 1 T3 m 0 i Energized 1 LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of supervised parameter Active limit E t gt Case A al gg Energized 1 Ha 0 F tl Case B Energized 1 t 0 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Parameters 5550 User s Manual 145 Code Description 3207 ISUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 ISUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 ISUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 P
355. parameter 9902 to 8 TORQUE CTRL Connection example 1 10 1 5 Signal cable shield screen L 142 External speed reference 1 0 10 V 25 113 AGND Analog input circuit 2 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC p 5 AI External torque reference 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA Note 1 1 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 TEC 9 AGND Analog output circuit common Reverses rotation direction in 9 outp speed control 110 24 Auxiliary voltage output 24 DC Reverses torque direction in 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common torque control 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 113 1011 Start stop Activation starts the drive 114 012 Forward reverse Activation reverses direction 115 DI3 Speed torque control Activation selects torque control L7 16 1014 Constant speed 1 1202 L 117 015 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair L 18 016 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 RO1 Default operation The sensor needs to be powered 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 See the manufacturer s instructions 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable connecti
356. parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACS550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils 0x0F Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single Holding Registers command Embedded fieldbus 202 ACS550 User s Manual Mapping summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS
357. parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANopen 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 5102 5126 PAR 2 PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings 0 DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number Z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification e File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT
358. peed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 1 2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations 1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for ExT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for ExT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to 1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to 1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function Timed Function activated EXT2 Timed Function de activated 1 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10
359. pm 10 0 Hz U1 720 rpm 12 0 Hz 1204 8 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 900 rpm 15 0 Hz U1 1080 rpm 18 0 Hz 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 1200 rpm 20 0 Hz U1 1440 rpm 24 0 Hz Parameters 88 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 1206 8 SPEED 5 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 1500 rpm 25 0 Hz U1 1800 rpm 30 0 Hz 1207 cONST SPEED 6 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 2400 rpm 40 0 Hz U1 2880 rpm 48 0 Hz 1208 8 SPEED 7 0 30000 0 0 500 0 2 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 3000 rpm 50 0 Hz U1 3600 rpm 60 0 Hz 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 81 2 3 2 cs1 2 3 4 1 2 cs1 2 3 4 v Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS 1301 MINIMUM 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1302 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1303 FILTER AI1 0 0 10 05 0 15 0 15 1304 AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1305 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1306 FILTER 2 0 0 10 0 s 0 15 0 15 Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 47 52 1 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 47 52 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 47 52 1 FAULT 1 1404 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 15 0 05 1405 Ro 1 OFF DELAY 0 0
360. priate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1102 1 2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 SELECT 8 Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM Al Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM AI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following sections as appropriate Reference scaling on page 236 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 240 Generic profile technical data System control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Fieldbus adapter ACS550 User s Manual
361. provide a connection example for each macro The last section in this chapter Macro default values for parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro Application macros 72 ABB Standard macro ACS550 User s Manual This is the default macro lt provides a general purpose 2 wire configuration with three 3 constant speeds Parameter values are the default values defined in section Complete parameter list on page 85 Connection example 1 1 10 kohm 1 5 Signal cable shield screen 11 2 All External frequency reference 1 0 10 vi 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 10 Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA HT 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 79 Analog output circuit common 110124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DH Start Stop Activate to start 14 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 014 Constant speed selection 17 1015 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair L7 148
362. r 2101 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST If your selection is 0 OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON which performs a separate ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to do the ID Run value 1 ON continue by following the separate instructions given on page 39 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 34 IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 OFF IDMAGN As stated above the identification magnetization is performed only if parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Press key amp j to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press to start the drive The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left LOC switch to local control by pressing 5 XXX Hz To go to the Main menu press
363. r ACS550 drives by frame size is 1 and 2 built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from ABB R3 R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts Selecting the braking resistors frame sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value RwiN defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 150 of heavy duty or 110 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed Rmax If maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed Rmax The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s the rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins minimum braking time OFF If the regene
364. r classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer to the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and notes U1 V1 W11 3 phase power supply input Input power connections on page 263 PE Protective Ground Ground connections on page 266 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor connections on page 271 1 The ACS550 x1 xxxx 2 208 240 V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 To locate input power and motor connection terminals see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 For specifications on power terminals see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 268 For corner grounded TN systems see section Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 For IT systems see section systems on page 268 Installation 5550 User s Manual 19 For frame size R6 see section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size page 269 to install the appropriate cable lugs For drives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Frame size Terminal Description Braking accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking resistor Braking resistor See section Brake components on page 277 R3 R4 R5 R6 UDC UDC DC
365. r overheating using a model see Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Code Description 3501 ISENSOR Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT100 C PTC ohm or thermistor ISee parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input A11 or AI2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors ohm Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4000 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor emperature rises over the PTC reference temperature as does he voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function 550 reads the voltage through analog input 11 and converts it into ohms The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 1330 he motor operating temperature 100 Temperature Resistance Normal 3 kohm Excessive gt 28 kohm
366. r profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Fieldbus fault code Drive fault code DRIVECOM specification 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 AI1 LOSS 8110h 8 AI2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h 15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 Obsolete FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h Fieldbus adapter 230 Drive fault code Fieldbus fault code DRIVECOM specification 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CON FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTP WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630Fh 37 CB OVERTEMP 4110h 38 USER LOAD CURVE FF6Bh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP 1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved
367. r s Manual 259 Technical data Ratings By type code the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings NEMA ratings shaded columns frame size Ratings 208 240 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 267 Type code Normal use Heavy duty use Frame 5550 1 hon Py bna Pha Pha mE see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 0 75 1 3 5 0 55 0 75 R1 06A6 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 4 6 0 75 1 R1 07A5 2 7 5 1 5 2 6 6 1 1 15 R1 012A 2 11 8 22 3 7 5 1 5 2 R1 017A 2 16 7 4 5 11 8 2 2 3 R1 024A 2 24 2 5 5 7 5 16 7 4 5 R2 031A 2 30 8 7 5 10 24 2 5 5 7 5 R2 046A 2 46 2 11 15 30 8 7 5 10 R3 059A 2 59 4 15 20 46 2 11 15 R3 075A 2 74 8 18 5 25 59 4 15 20 R4 088A 2 88 0 22 30 74 8 18 5 25 R4 114A 2 114 30 40 88 0 22 30 R4 143A 2 143 37 50 114 30 40 R6 178A 2 178 45 60 150 37 50 R6 221A 2 221 55 T5 178 45 60 R6 248A 2 248 75 100 192 55 75 R6 00467918 xls Technical data 260 ACS550 User s Manual Ratings 380 480 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 261 Type code Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 x1 hn Py Py Size see below
368. range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder 0 OFF IDMAGN The Motor ID Run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed 1 oN Enables the Motor ID Run during which the motor is rotating at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equipment Note If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the ID Run WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 39 Parameters
369. ration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods A Braking ON Time Braking i d ON time OFF time e gt Cycle time Duty cycle Cycle time mi the peak braking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Technical data 278 Power A Deceleration curve Avg braking power overhauling load X Avg braking power ACS550 User s Manual Overhauling load curve during deceleration Time 5 to zero Temperature 2x 4 Xo m ZZ Pap 2 nu The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables First determine your maximum braking time ON ONyAx minimum braking time OFF OFF yn and load type deceleration or overhauling load Calculate duty cycle ONmax 10096 ONmax OFF win Duty cycle Inthe appropriate table find the
370. re The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation page 29 Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use the Start up Assistant Press E when is highlighted to run the Start up Assistant Press if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant Press key Cy to highlight and then press X if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the Start up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to the drive SELECTING THE LANGUAGE If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with keys A Kw and press lt to accept EXIT If you press tZ the Start up Assistant is stopped STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks starting with the motor s
371. ree Constant Speeds 1 3 using 013 D14 See above 011 2 1 for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 014 015 See above 11 2 for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using 015 pI6 See above 11 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 011 012 013 Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 de activated 1 activated A DI2 DI3 Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 Constant speed 2 Constant speed 3 Constant speed 4 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 0 0 Constant speed 7 1208 1202 1203 1204 1205 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 o o o ol o o o 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using 013 DI4 and 015 See above pI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using D14 015 and 016 See above pI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 ICONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 1208 ICONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a v
372. resis if time is reversed the path backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 Low 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if f Hz P 8109 N fuax4 P 8112 8112 1 fmin 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the opera second auxiliary motor stops if Two auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz ion or at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the opera The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz ion or at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 sTART FREQ 1 for a
373. response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 i o comm and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 i o COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 2 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also se
374. rotation is reset See the first bullet above 8119 100 Parameters 5550 User s Manual 181 Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled An interlock is active when its command signal is absent interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with 011 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 an
375. roup 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER 51 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 81 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels ACS550 User s Manual 59 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC U MAIN MENU i by pressing gt repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC U COPY MENU l i UPLOAD TO PANEL C A and CY 2 and pressing DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from
376. roup parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 ExT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input 011 011 activated Start 011 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 2 011 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input 011 011 activated Start 011 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input D12 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input 011 In order to start the drive the digital input 012 must be activated prior to the pulse in 011 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P Directi
377. s 40 m m 49 58 20 67 Nm 5 s 14 W 23 32 kHz 41 7 kg s 50 ft s 59 in wg 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg im 51 fP m 60 ftwg 7 16 F 25 PSI 34 43 kgh 52 f l 61 lbsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 35 pps 44 53 Ib s 62 ms following units useful for the display 17 ref 119 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 118 120 96 LD 122 124 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3407 1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL2 Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3
378. s parameter 172 parity errors parameter 172 RS485comm 190 run enable source select parameter 121 run time data 100 102 maintenance trigger 139 5 Safely esser RC Rb Xd P 5 save changes 122 scalar frequency 98 scaling actual value FBA ABB drives profile 239 actual value FBA generic profile 241 actual values EFB comm 197 reference EFB ABB drives 218 reference FBA ABB drives 236 reference FBA generic profile 240 screw on terminal lugs 270 s curve ramp 131 second environment C3 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 293 motor cable length 272 definition e s ra ace Pene d 293 sensor type 151 sensorless vector control 98 serial 1 error fault code 28 200 serial 1 error fault code 247 serial communication see EFB embedded fieldbus see EFB drive parameters see FBA fieldbus adapter see FBA drive parameters serial 12 13 SENICE I LL oues wr ex AOU Eee ERN 309 setpoint maximum PID parameter 163 setpoi
379. s adapter module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Other devices Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see sections Modbus protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this chapter e fieldbus adapter FBA See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 221 Control interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 Input words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Embedded fieldbus 190 ACS550 User s Manual Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning
380. s at the top 4 Reinstall the rubber plugs lt 17 IP2002 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Installation 18 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring overview Conduit Gland kit Wiring drives with the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit gland kit with the following items conduit gland box five 5 cable clamps ACS550 01 only screws Cover The kit is included with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures Wiring requirements be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in A WARNING Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550 The drive must section Preparing for installation on page 12 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following There are four sets of wiring instructions one set for each combination of drive enclosure type IP21 UL type and IP54 UL type 12 and wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 274 In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these fou
381. s bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used See DI1 INV above 2014 TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See 011 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 valu
382. s the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input power mains voltage Parameters 5550 User s Manual 99 Code Description 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 long where loy is drive current 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency e Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz e Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT e Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates the motor motor rotating and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run is especially effective when vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed
383. scard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive R65 R6 Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed 2 For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires OF Ov de co Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals 4 Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable 1 5007 size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 7 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail 9 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end 10 Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 11 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 29 Check installation Before applying power perform the following checks Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets t
384. ser s Manual 139 Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Code Description 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter When parameter 2901 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter Value is compared to parameter 2904 value 0 Disables the trigger 2904 REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter When parameter 2903 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 Resets the parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter Value is compared to parameter 2906 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2906 RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual va
385. speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is 9 6 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kb s 19 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 38 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 57 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 0 Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 193 Activate drive control functions EFB Controlling the drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific
386. stallation on page 12 Prepare the mounting location on page 16 Remove the front cover on page 16 Mount the drive on page 17 Wiring overview on page 18 and Install the wiring on page 24 Check installation on page 29 Reinstall the cover on page 30 How to start up the drive on page 31 Installation 12 ACS550 User s Manual Preparing for installation Lifting the drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpacking the drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found IP2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive identification Drive labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the mounting holes or ACS550 01 08A8 4 amp Type code Phd 40 30 Semo Serial number type code label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the drive cover Two examples of the type code label are given below Input 01 3 380 480 V IP21 UL 1 NEMA 1 88A Saudi ABB Oy n 48 63 Hz C QWs Output U2 3 0 U1 V 8 An nom I2N I2hd 8 8 6 9 ae etn I Motor PN Phd 4 0 3 0 kW lt Serial number For more information see User s Manual 4 Date
387. t and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop method 1 cOAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Setthe pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 DC HOLD Motor Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold speed e ee SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See the diagram 4 T Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter Ref 2105 When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive resumes normal operation DC hold T 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has speed
388. t pair 1 DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref no op 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref no op These bits are only for supervision purposes 29 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected in link Link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH 1 is pending Start inhibit request is OFF Start inhibit request 31 OFF_INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button pressed For the control panel or PC tool this is the OFF button interlock no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded fieldbus 5550 User s Manual 213 ABB Drives profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile EFB STATUS worD See parameter 5320 Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault 4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON I
389. t starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 ITRIM MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 7 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Parameters ACS550 User s Manual 169 Code Description 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SwITCH OR 1105 REF1 MAX when REF1 is active A 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ Ramped ref Select Switch par 4230 Trim scale Mul Mul gt gt gt Ext ref 1 max A off Ext ref 2 max B proportional Add Trimmed ref gt Yi Abs max speed 4 direct Select freq C par 4232
390. t value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values 1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT1 Actual value 1 1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 sqrt AcT1 2 Square root of the value for 1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 sqA1 sqA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 sqrt AcT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM F
391. ter 141 72 sos Ep HS 141 time fault parameter 141 standards Ban Pid 291 CG22 2NO 14 Cu 291 CE marking se Sepe ete ak m 291 CSA Marking ein IER hoe 292 C Tick 0 291 EN 50178 2 Abel Drm EQUES 291 60664 1 22 re nere E a 291 IEC EN 60204 1 291 IEC EN 60529 5 ea RR 291 IEC EN 61800 3 291 IEC EN 61800 5 1 291 UL 508C a She ya Stee ean 291 LL marking aces ap ER ae ERE e REA 292 start parameter 128 aux motor parameters 176 aux motor 177 control EFB 193 control 225 DC magnetizing time parameter 128 delay parameter 185 delay parameter 130 frequency PFC parameters 176 function parameter 128 inhibit 129 select enable source parameter 123 torque boost current parameter 129 start mode automatic c oec eR ES 128 automatic torque boost 128 DC magnetizing 128 flying st Si eases wane ae PEE as 128 start stop parameter
392. ter 140 thermal time fault parameter 140 motor auxiliary aux start order parameter 186 aux start delay PFC parameter 177 aux stop delay PFC parameter 177 number of aux 178 mounting 286 template pedet e lene een 16 MWh counter data parameter 102 intake energy data parameter 103 power consumption maintenance trigger 139 N NEMA ratings See ratings noise random sw freq parameter 138 Index NPN aoe Sas usut wee nit 23 offset PID 168 ok messages count parameter 172 operating data parameter group 100 operation Assistant Control Panel 43 Basic Control Panel 63 link fault code 246 power 246 bpliong oc loc s tA ci ts 13 parameter 187 ah we Pee eios 13 output frequency data parameter 100 voltage data parameter 100 wiring fault 247 output mode Assistant Control Panel 47 Basic Control Panel 65 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 143 faultCcod amp 244 overload curve
393. ters Group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID Run it must be repeated ID Run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here For Assistant Control Panel see page 49 and for Basic Control Panel page 67 in chapter Control panels PRE CHECK WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 8096 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run De couple the motor from the driven equipment Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905 9909 are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate as shown in the steps on page 33 If parameter values Group 01 OPERATING DATA to Group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt long 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run Enable signal is on parameter 1601 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown on the left at the top Press key to Switch between local and remote control Start up control with I O and ID Run 40
394. the LOC UPAR BACKUP drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Copy menu with keys gt and amp w 2 and press lt During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press if you want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press lt to return to the Copy menu To perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Copy menu with keys and S w 2 and press The display shows the transfer status as a ABORT percentage of completion Press w if you want stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press to return to the Copy menu 50 Y ul ss Copying parameters ETAIT ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_upload successful OK 1 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters full set 50 ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_download successful ly completed OK 1 00 00 Control panels 60 How to view information about the backup ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressin
395. the booster signal 3623 BOOSTER TIME l Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel signal is released If parameter value is 01 30 00 booster is Booster active active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation is released l Activation DI ka p Booster time 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Defines the time periods used by the timer NOT SEL No time periods have been selected 1 T1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 T2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 T1 T2 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 T3 Time Period 3 selected the timer 5 T1 T3 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 2 3 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 T1 T2 T3 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 T4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 T1 T4 Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 10 2 4 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 11 T1 T2 T4 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 12 T3 T4 Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 13 T1 T3 T4 Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 14 2 13 74 Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 15 T1 T2 T3 T4 Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER Booster selected in the timer 17 T1 B Booster and Time Period 1 selected the timer 18
396. the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys A gt and lt 2 and press lt S Repeat for the second part After CANCEL specifying the year press lt To cancel your changes press w To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press lt Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press lt enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press lt To return to the previous display without making changes press gt Display LOC USET DATE 1 amp 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 EU US Australial NSW Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC HELP EU On Mar last Sunday Off Oct last Sunday US EXIT 00 00 Control panels 58 ACS550 User s Manual Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to two user sets
397. the open position for installation and maintenance work Europe To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types switch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power Technical data 264 Fuses 208 240 V drives ACS550 User s Manual ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06 6 2 6 6 07 5 2 7 5 012 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 30 JJS 30 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 17
398. tion of the operation second auxiliary motor starts if One auxiliary motor is running 5550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motors are running 5550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Parameters 5550 User s Manual 177 Code Description 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Only one the first auxiliary motor is running ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D After the first auxiliary motor stops Output frequency increases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREO 1 n effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See the figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 On Grey path 7 Shows hyste
399. tor Frame sizes R5 R6 differ See next page 3AUA0000001571 Optional braking Frame Terminal size labels R1 R2 BRK BRK Brake resistor R3 R4 UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor Brake options WARNING For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing On ACS550 01 screws EM1 and EM3 On ACS550 U1 screw EM1 drive is shipped with EM3 already removed See IT systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 Installation 5550 User s Manual 21 The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R5 R6 Power input Power output to motor 01 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 F1 Optional braking Frame Terminal size labels R5 R6 UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor Brake options X0013 Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 WARNING For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing screws F1 and F2 See T systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 Installation 22 ACS550
400. tor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 1 Of E 7 Fuses 2 1 3 5 13 3 ay ce OnEF 2 4 6 i 14 4 1 4 5550 d 01 V1 W1 Thermal switch standard in gt ABB resistors K1 Parameter set up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE Technical data 5550 User s Manual Control connections 281 Control connection specifications Control connection specifications Analog inputs and See section Control terminals table on page 22 digital outputs outputs Digital inputs m awa input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 Relays Max continuous current 2 A rms cos 1 1 Arms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Cable specifications See section Control terminals table on page 22 Control cables General recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire screen temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above
401. tput power connections Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The 5550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100964 autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL PID output 4PFC Stops the speed regulated motor 81191 3PFC Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFC 4 Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors 2PFC T Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated 1PFC t motor Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was gt P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated P8118 I P8118 motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to B the ACS550 power output A 7 Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs Identifies the next constant speed motor in
402. ttached to the drive sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 104 for the bit definitions FWD Correcting faults The recommended corrective action for faults is Fault Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Reset the drive See section Fault resetting on page 249 listing The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when the fault occurs The fault names shown for Assistant Control Panel only in the Fault Logger mode see page 55 and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Fault Fault name in Description and recommended corrective action code panel 1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections Diagnostics 5550 User s Manual 245 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER T
403. tting For example if 1103 REF 1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 7103 REF1 SELECT has value 11 you can change its value to e g Al2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1706 REF2 SELECT to AI1 start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing gt repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys LOC CU I O SETTINGS 1 and Cy and pressing SS ANALOG INPUTS AI RELAY OUTPUTS ROUT ANALOG OUTPUTS AOUT PANEL EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the I O group e g DIGITAL INPUTS with keys w 2 and LOC USHOW 1 0 1 SEL A DI1 press After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the OOL START STOP selection DT2 DI3 EXIT 00 00 4 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys and Cw LOC UPAR EDIT EDIT and press lt J 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS DI1 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the setting with keys A and amp w 2 LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once i
404. ue is 5 timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily start time See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 Parameters 154 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster signal NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines 011 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as
405. uency a three motor system Example In the diagram below the pumping station s P4014 outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A lt 96 A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running Mains 3 3 4 Contactors C Two auxiliary motors running 3 Acssso P1 gt P2 3 1 tank Inlet pi 2 Outlet 2 nlet pipe i 2 Outlet pipe3 2 8122 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects control When enabled PFC control Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters
406. uge or a fan DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Parameters 126 5550 User s Manual Code Description 2007 MINIMUM FREQ m Freq 2007 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency P 2008 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Frequency range allowed Time 4 0 See the figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 12008 MAXIMUM FREQ R2007 Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 Frequency range allowed P 2007 0 Time 2007 Frequency range allowed P 2008 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used See 011 above 7 COMM Define
407. uld be installedin No conductive dust allowed NL to enclosure Chemical gases Class 1C2 Contamination pus Solid particles Class 152 levels Cooling air must be clean free from T IEC 721 3 3 corrosive materials and free from ransportation electrically conductive dust No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 3C2 Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 352 Solid particles Class 252 Technical data 290 Materials ACS550 User s Manual The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS550 passes Stress tests Without shipping package Inside shipping package Mechanical conditions In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B specifications Sinusoidal with IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3 4 vibration 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61cm 24 in frame size R2 46cm 18 in frame size Free fall 81cm 12 frame size R4 25 cm 10 in frame size R5 15cm frame size R6 Material specifications Drive enclosure PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y or NCS 7000 N Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers If the surface is painted the total thickness of the coating zinc and paint
408. ults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with long high capacitance motor cables Technical data 274 ACS550 User s Manual Grounding and routing Motor cable shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive Armored cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables Shielded cable For shielded cable details see section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 274 Grounding See section Ground connections on page 266 For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see section Effective motor cable screens on page 275 Drive s motor connection terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have t
409. us control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1001 ExT1 10 Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus adapter 226 ACS550 User s Manual Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1002 ExT2 10 Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires drive parameter value set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appro
410. user load curve loading package version parameter 146 LOC local control indication on Assistant Control Panel 43 indication on Basic Control Panel 62 local control mode lock parameter 122 lock control panel access 54 30 drive control at local control panel 122 121 low frequency parameters 177 lugs for R6 power 269 ring 269 terminal screw on 270 Index ACS550 User s Manual M macros SANIEG aste peek qi RE eee Ae 73 ABB standard default 72 alternate 74 hand a t osos drew eer sa 76 motor potentiometer 75 zit then 78 PID COMO 77 torque control 79 user parameter sets 81 parameter default values 82 parameters not 71 magnetization identification 99 main menu Assistant Control 44 Basic Control 63 mains see input power maintenance 258 control panels ur u nido 258 heat Sinki eee e ERA Sa 255 internal enclosure fan
411. ust be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure the IP54 UL type 12 enclosure has the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure a different outer plastic cover an additional internal fan to improve cooling larger dimensions thesame rating does not require a derating Ambient conditions The following table lists the ACS550 environmental requirements Ambient environment requirements Storage and transportation in the Installation site P protective package 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft i 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Altitud i Py and lzy derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if Py and lzy derated to 90 i Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if Ambient Mit Py and lzy derated to 80 temperature Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if Py and lzy derated to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for 5550 01 032 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 Relative lt 95 non condensing humidity No conductive dust allowed Storage ACS550 sho
412. ut from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Control Word CW References Process cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values Service Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt gt Acyclic Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus System The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive Switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Fieldbus adapter 5550 User s Manual 223 Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232 Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status informati
413. ves P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 1 262 785 3200 1 800 HELP 365 Fax 1 262 780 5135 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 Telephone 86 10 5821 7788 86 10 5821 7618 Internet www abb com
414. when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 AI1 Loss Energize relay when 11 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 7 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 7 PFC Use relay to start stop motor in PFC control See Group 81 PFC CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER MACRO 2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Parameters 5550 User s Manual 117 Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following 0134 Binary RO6 5 4 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energi
415. wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the pig tail short to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp IP5004 4 Route both cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps 5 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive 10 11 terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm2 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen to the GND terminal Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s 9 11 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog cables at 1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for 5485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 8 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 5005 Installation 28 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with conduit 1 Depends on frame size R1 R4 Remove and di
416. y adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group PANEL LOC REM selection LOC REM 40 Panel REF1 wien REF1 Panel REF 2 P1106 0 17 REF2 0 2 500 Setpoint 20 21 500 19 1 4016 G40 Current PID1 Torque Power cu A P4077 1 0144 40157 Torque PID Act Value Power Panel REF 1 P1103 BETIS DS cone 1104 1 1105 Ab Speed Comm REF 1 EXT2 Panel REF 2 Sed P1106 Cons Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel REF2 P4010 PID Setpoint 0 17 1107 71 4012 pijos Al2 P4013 19 Internal G40 AI P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque Power P4014 P4015 Curren 09 PID Act Value Torque Power
417. ze relay 36 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 5 4 RO2 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMED FUNC 1 Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 38 40 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Energize relay when Timed Function 2 4 is active See TIMED FUNC 1 above 41 MNT TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 42 MNT TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 43 MNT TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 44 MNT TRIG MWH Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 46 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active 47 USER LOAD Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 52 JOG ACTIVE Energize relay when the jogging function is active 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means See 1401 RELAY

EN / ACS550-01/U1 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents